remove gettext docs, they have nothing to do in our cvs (see patch 1713939)
git-svn-id: https://svn.wxwidgets.org/svn/wx/wxWidgets/trunk@45995 c3d73ce0-8a6f-49c7-b76d-6d57e0e08775
This commit is contained in:
parent
3c448b2e88
commit
62d8ddb2ee
@ -1,636 +0,0 @@
|
||||
<HTML>
|
||||
<HEAD>
|
||||
<!-- This HTML file has been created by texi2html 1.54
|
||||
from gettext.texi on 25 January 1999 -->
|
||||
|
||||
<TITLE>GNU gettext utilities - Introduction</TITLE>
|
||||
<link href="gettext_2.html" rel=Next>
|
||||
<link href="gettext_toc.html" rel=ToC>
|
||||
|
||||
</HEAD>
|
||||
<BODY>
|
||||
<p>Go to the first, previous, <A HREF="gettext_2.html">next</A>, <A HREF="gettext_12.html">last</A> section, <A HREF="gettext_toc.html">table of contents</A>.
|
||||
<P><HR><P>
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
<H1><A NAME="SEC1" HREF="gettext_toc.html#TOC1">Introduction</A></H1>
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
<BLOCKQUOTE>
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
This manual is still in <EM>DRAFT</EM> state. Some sections are still
|
||||
empty, or almost. We keep merging material from other sources
|
||||
(essentially e-mail folders) while the proper integration of this
|
||||
material is delayed.
|
||||
</BLOCKQUOTE>
|
||||
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
In this manual, we use <EM>he</EM> when speaking of the programmer or
|
||||
maintainer, <EM>she</EM> when speaking of the translator, and <EM>they</EM>
|
||||
when speaking of the installers or end users of the translated program.
|
||||
This is only a convenience for clarifying the documentation. It is
|
||||
<EM>absolutely</EM> not meant to imply that some roles are more appropriate
|
||||
to males or females. Besides, as you might guess, GNU <CODE>gettext</CODE>
|
||||
is meant to be useful for people using computers, whatever their sex,
|
||||
race, religion or nationality!
|
||||
|
||||
</P>
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
This chapter explains the goals sought in the creation
|
||||
of GNU <CODE>gettext</CODE> and the free Translation Project.
|
||||
Then, it explains a few broad concepts around
|
||||
Native Language Support, and positions message translation with regard
|
||||
to other aspects of national and cultural variance, as they apply to
|
||||
to programs. It also surveys those files used to convey the
|
||||
translations. It explains how the various tools interact in the
|
||||
initial generation of these files, and later, how the maintenance
|
||||
cycle should usually operate.
|
||||
|
||||
</P>
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
Please send suggestions and corrections to:
|
||||
|
||||
</P>
|
||||
|
||||
<PRE>
|
||||
Internet address:
|
||||
bug-gnu-utils@prep.ai.mit.edu
|
||||
</PRE>
|
||||
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
Please include the manual's edition number and update date in your messages.
|
||||
|
||||
</P>
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
<H2><A NAME="SEC2" HREF="gettext_toc.html#TOC2">The Purpose of GNU <CODE>gettext</CODE></A></H2>
|
||||
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
Usually, programs are written and documented in English, and use
|
||||
English at execution time to interact with users. This is true
|
||||
not only of GNU software, but also of a great deal of commercial
|
||||
and free software. Using a common language is quite handy for
|
||||
communication between developers, maintainers and users from all
|
||||
countries. On the other hand, most people are less comfortable with
|
||||
English than with their own native language, and would prefer to
|
||||
use their mother tongue for day to day's work, as far as possible.
|
||||
Many would simply <EM>love</EM> to see their computer screen showing
|
||||
a lot less of English, and far more of their own language.
|
||||
|
||||
</P>
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
However, to many people, this dream might appear so far fetched that
|
||||
they may believe it is not even worth spending time thinking about
|
||||
it. They have no confidence at all that the dream might ever
|
||||
become true. Yet some have not lost hope, and have organized themselves.
|
||||
The Translation Project is a formalization of this hope into a
|
||||
workable structure, which has a good chance to get all of us nearer
|
||||
the achievement of a truly multi-lingual set of programs.
|
||||
|
||||
</P>
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
GNU <CODE>gettext</CODE> is an important step for the Translation Project,
|
||||
as it is an asset on which we may build many other steps. This package
|
||||
offers to programmers, translators and even users, a well integrated
|
||||
set of tools and documentation. Specifically, the GNU <CODE>gettext</CODE>
|
||||
utilities are a set of tools that provides a framework within which
|
||||
other free packages may produce multi-lingual messages. These tools
|
||||
include a set of conventions about how programs should be written to
|
||||
support message catalogs, a directory and file naming organization for the
|
||||
message catalogs themselves, a runtime library supporting the retrieval of
|
||||
translated messages, and a few stand-alone programs to massage in various
|
||||
ways the sets of translatable strings, or already translated strings.
|
||||
A special mode for GNU Emacs also helps ease interested parties into
|
||||
preparing these sets, or bringing them up to date.
|
||||
|
||||
</P>
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
GNU <CODE>gettext</CODE> is designed to minimize the impact of
|
||||
internationalization on program sources, keeping this impact as small
|
||||
and hardly noticeable as possible. Internationalization has better
|
||||
chances of succeeding if it is very light weighted, or at least,
|
||||
appear to be so, when looking at program sources.
|
||||
|
||||
</P>
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
The Translation Project also uses the GNU <CODE>gettext</CODE>
|
||||
distribution as a vehicle for documenting its structure and methods.
|
||||
This goes beyond the strict technicalities of documenting the GNU <CODE>gettext</CODE>
|
||||
proper. By so doing, translators will find in a single place, as
|
||||
far as possible, all they need to know for properly doing their
|
||||
translating work. Also, this supplemental documentation might also
|
||||
help programmers, and even curious users, in understanding how GNU
|
||||
<CODE>gettext</CODE> is related to the remainder of the Translation
|
||||
Project, and consequently, have a glimpse at the <EM>big picture</EM>.
|
||||
|
||||
</P>
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
<H2><A NAME="SEC3" HREF="gettext_toc.html#TOC3">I18n, L10n, and Such</A></H2>
|
||||
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
Two long words appear all the time when we discuss support of native
|
||||
language in programs, and these words have a precise meaning, worth
|
||||
being explained here, once and for all in this document. The words are
|
||||
<EM>internationalization</EM> and <EM>localization</EM>. Many people,
|
||||
tired of writing these long words over and over again, took the
|
||||
habit of writing <STRONG>i18n</STRONG> and <STRONG>l10n</STRONG> instead, quoting the first
|
||||
and last letter of each word, and replacing the run of intermediate
|
||||
letters by a number merely telling how many such letters there are.
|
||||
But in this manual, in the sake of clarity, we will patiently write
|
||||
the names in full, each time...
|
||||
|
||||
</P>
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
By <STRONG>internationalization</STRONG>, one refers to the operation by which a
|
||||
program, or a set of programs turned into a package, is made aware of and
|
||||
able to support multiple languages. This is a generalization process,
|
||||
by which the programs are untied from calling only English strings or
|
||||
other English specific habits, and connected to generic ways of doing
|
||||
the same, instead. Program developers may use various techniques to
|
||||
internationalize their programs. Some of these have been standardized.
|
||||
GNU <CODE>gettext</CODE> offers one of these standards. See section <A HREF="gettext_8.html#SEC39">The Programmer's View</A>.
|
||||
|
||||
</P>
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
By <STRONG>localization</STRONG>, one means the operation by which, in a set
|
||||
of programs already internationalized, one gives the program all
|
||||
needed information so that it can adapt itself to handle its input
|
||||
and output in a fashion which is correct for some native language and
|
||||
cultural habits. This is a particularisation process, by which generic
|
||||
methods already implemented in an internationalized program are used
|
||||
in specific ways. The programming environment puts several functions
|
||||
to the programmers disposal which allow this runtime configuration.
|
||||
The formal description of specific set of cultural habits for some
|
||||
country, together with all associated translations targeted to the
|
||||
same native language, is called the <STRONG>locale</STRONG> for this language
|
||||
or country. Users achieve localization of programs by setting proper
|
||||
values to special environment variables, prior to executing those
|
||||
programs, identifying which locale should be used.
|
||||
|
||||
</P>
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
In fact, locale message support is only one component of the cultural
|
||||
data that makes up a particular locale. There are a whole host of
|
||||
routines and functions provided to aid programmers in developing
|
||||
internationalized software and which allow them to access the data
|
||||
stored in a particular locale. When someone presently refers to a
|
||||
particular locale, they are obviously referring to the data stored
|
||||
within that particular locale. Similarly, if a programmer is referring
|
||||
to "accessing the locale routines", they are referring to the
|
||||
complete suite of routines that access all of the locale's information.
|
||||
|
||||
</P>
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
One uses the expression <STRONG>Native Language Support</STRONG>, or merely NLS,
|
||||
for speaking of the overall activity or feature encompassing both
|
||||
internationalization and localization, allowing for multi-lingual
|
||||
interactions in a program. In a nutshell, one could say that
|
||||
internationalization is the operation by which further localizations
|
||||
are made possible.
|
||||
|
||||
</P>
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
Also, very roughly said, when it comes to multi-lingual messages,
|
||||
internationalization is usually taken care of by programmers, and
|
||||
localization is usually taken care of by translators.
|
||||
|
||||
</P>
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
<H2><A NAME="SEC4" HREF="gettext_toc.html#TOC4">Aspects in Native Language Support</A></H2>
|
||||
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
For a totally multi-lingual distribution, there are many things to
|
||||
translate beyond output messages.
|
||||
|
||||
</P>
|
||||
|
||||
<UL>
|
||||
<LI>
|
||||
|
||||
As of today, GNU <CODE>gettext</CODE> offers a complete toolset for
|
||||
translating messages output by C programs. Perl scripts and shell
|
||||
scripts will also need to be translated. Even if there are today some hooks
|
||||
by which this can be done, these hooks are not integrated as well as they
|
||||
should be.
|
||||
|
||||
<LI>
|
||||
|
||||
Some programs, like <CODE>autoconf</CODE> or <CODE>bison</CODE>, are able
|
||||
to produce other programs (or scripts). Even if the generating
|
||||
programs themselves are internationalized, the generated programs they
|
||||
produce may need internationalization on their own, and this indirect
|
||||
internationalization could be automated right from the generating
|
||||
program. In fact, quite usually, generating and generated programs
|
||||
could be internationalized independently, as the effort needed is
|
||||
fairly orthogonal.
|
||||
|
||||
<LI>
|
||||
|
||||
A few programs include textual tables which might need translation
|
||||
themselves, independently of the strings contained in the program
|
||||
itself. For example, RFC 1345 gives an English description for each
|
||||
character which GNU <CODE>recode</CODE> is able to reconstruct at execution.
|
||||
Since these descriptions are extracted from the RFC by mechanical means,
|
||||
translating them properly would require a prior translation of the RFC
|
||||
itself.
|
||||
|
||||
<LI>
|
||||
|
||||
Almost all programs accept options, which are often worded out so to
|
||||
be descriptive for the English readers; one might want to consider
|
||||
offering translated versions for program options as well.
|
||||
|
||||
<LI>
|
||||
|
||||
Many programs read, interpret, compile, or are somewhat driven by
|
||||
input files which are texts containing keywords, identifiers, or
|
||||
replies which are inherently translatable. For example, one may want
|
||||
<CODE>gcc</CODE> to allow diacriticized characters in identifiers or use
|
||||
translated keywords; <SAMP>`rm -i'</SAMP> might accept something else than
|
||||
<SAMP>`y'</SAMP> or <SAMP>`n'</SAMP> for replies, etc. Even if the program will
|
||||
eventually make most of its output in the foreign languages, one has
|
||||
to decide whether the input syntax, option values, etc., are to be
|
||||
localized or not.
|
||||
|
||||
<LI>
|
||||
|
||||
The manual accompanying a package, as well as all documentation files
|
||||
in the distribution, could surely be translated, too. Translating a
|
||||
manual, with the intent of later keeping up with updates, is a major
|
||||
undertaking in itself, generally.
|
||||
|
||||
</UL>
|
||||
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
As we already stressed, translation is only one aspect of locales.
|
||||
Other internationalization aspects are not currently handled by GNU
|
||||
<CODE>gettext</CODE>, but perhaps may be handled in future versions. There
|
||||
are many attributes that are needed to define a country's cultural
|
||||
conventions. These attributes include beside the country's native
|
||||
language, the formatting of the date and time, the representation of
|
||||
numbers, the symbols for currency, etc. These local <STRONG>rules</STRONG> are
|
||||
termed the country's locale. The locale represents the knowledge
|
||||
needed to support the country's native attributes.
|
||||
|
||||
</P>
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
There are a few major areas which may vary between countries and
|
||||
hence, define what a locale must describe. The following list helps
|
||||
putting multi-lingual messages into the proper context of other tasks
|
||||
related to locales, and also presents some other areas which GNU
|
||||
<CODE>gettext</CODE> might eventually tackle, maybe, one of these days.
|
||||
|
||||
</P>
|
||||
<DL COMPACT>
|
||||
|
||||
<DT><EM>Characters and Codesets</EM>
|
||||
<DD>
|
||||
The codeset most commonly used through out the USA and most English
|
||||
speaking parts of the world is the ASCII codeset. However, there are
|
||||
many characters needed by various locales that are not found within
|
||||
this codeset. The 8-bit ISO 8859-1 code set has most of the special
|
||||
characters needed to handle the major European languages. However, in
|
||||
many cases, the ISO 8859-1 font is not adequate. Hence each locale
|
||||
will need to specify which codeset they need to use and will need
|
||||
to have the appropriate character handling routines to cope with
|
||||
the codeset.
|
||||
|
||||
<DT><EM>Currency</EM>
|
||||
<DD>
|
||||
The symbols used vary from country to country as does the position
|
||||
used by the symbol. Software needs to be able to transparently
|
||||
display currency figures in the native mode for each locale.
|
||||
|
||||
<DT><EM>Dates</EM>
|
||||
<DD>
|
||||
The format of date varies between locales. For example, Christmas day
|
||||
in 1994 is written as 12/25/94 in the USA and as 25/12/94 in Australia.
|
||||
Other countries might use ISO 8061 dates, etc.
|
||||
|
||||
Time of the day may be noted as <VAR>hh</VAR>:<VAR>mm</VAR>, <VAR>hh</VAR>.<VAR>mm</VAR>,
|
||||
or otherwise. Some locales require time to be specified in 24-hour
|
||||
mode rather than as AM or PM. Further, the nature and yearly extent
|
||||
of the Daylight Saving correction vary widely between countries.
|
||||
|
||||
<DT><EM>Numbers</EM>
|
||||
<DD>
|
||||
Numbers can be represented differently in different locales.
|
||||
For example, the following numbers are all written correctly for
|
||||
their respective locales:
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
<PRE>
|
||||
12,345.67 English
|
||||
12.345,67 French
|
||||
1,2345.67 Asia
|
||||
</PRE>
|
||||
|
||||
Some programs could go further and use different unit systems, like
|
||||
English units or Metric units, or even take into account variants
|
||||
about how numbers are spelled in full.
|
||||
|
||||
<DT><EM>Messages</EM>
|
||||
<DD>
|
||||
The most obvious area is the language support within a locale. This is
|
||||
where GNU <CODE>gettext</CODE> provides the means for developers and users to
|
||||
easily change the language that the software uses to communicate to
|
||||
the user.
|
||||
|
||||
</DL>
|
||||
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
In the near future we see no chance that components of locale outside of
|
||||
message handling will be made available for use in other
|
||||
packages. The reason for this is that most modern systems provide
|
||||
a more or less reasonable support for at least some of the missing
|
||||
components. Another point is that the GNU <CODE>libc</CODE> and Linux will get
|
||||
a new and complete implementation of the whole locale functionality
|
||||
which could be adopted by system lacking a reasonable locale support.
|
||||
|
||||
</P>
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
<H2><A NAME="SEC5" HREF="gettext_toc.html#TOC5">Files Conveying Translations</A></H2>
|
||||
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
The letters PO in <TT>`.po'</TT> files means Portable Object, to
|
||||
distinguish it from <TT>`.mo'</TT> files, where MO stands for Machine
|
||||
Object. This paradigm, as well as the PO file format, is inspired
|
||||
by the NLS standard developed by Uniforum, and implemented by Sun
|
||||
in their Solaris system.
|
||||
|
||||
</P>
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
PO files are meant to be read and edited by humans, and associate each
|
||||
original, translatable string of a given package with its translation
|
||||
in a particular target language. A single PO file is dedicated to
|
||||
a single target language. If a package supports many languages,
|
||||
there is one such PO file per language supported, and each package
|
||||
has its own set of PO files. These PO files are best created by
|
||||
the <CODE>xgettext</CODE> program, and later updated or refreshed through
|
||||
the <CODE>msgmerge</CODE> program. Program <CODE>xgettext</CODE> extracts all
|
||||
marked messages from a set of C files and initializes a PO file with
|
||||
empty translations. Program <CODE>msgmerge</CODE> takes care of adjusting
|
||||
PO files between releases of the corresponding sources, commenting
|
||||
obsolete entries, initializing new ones, and updating all source
|
||||
line references. Files ending with <TT>`.pot'</TT> are kind of base
|
||||
translation files found in distributions, in PO file format, and
|
||||
<TT>`.pox'</TT> files are often temporary PO files.
|
||||
|
||||
</P>
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
MO files are meant to be read by programs, and are binary in nature.
|
||||
A few systems already offer tools for creating and handling MO files
|
||||
as part of the Native Language Support coming with the system, but the
|
||||
format of these MO files is often different from system to system,
|
||||
and non-portable. They do not necessary use <TT>`.mo'</TT> for file
|
||||
extensions, but since system libraries are also used for accessing
|
||||
these files, it works as long as the system is self-consistent about
|
||||
it. If GNU <CODE>gettext</CODE> is able to interface with the tools already
|
||||
provided with systems, it will consequently let these provided tools
|
||||
take care of generating the MO files. Or else, if such tools are not
|
||||
found or do not seem usable, GNU <CODE>gettext</CODE> will use its own ways
|
||||
and its own format for MO files. Files ending with <TT>`.gmo'</TT> are
|
||||
really MO files, when it is known that these files use the GNU format.
|
||||
|
||||
</P>
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
<H2><A NAME="SEC6" HREF="gettext_toc.html#TOC6">Overview of GNU <CODE>gettext</CODE></A></H2>
|
||||
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
The following diagram summarizes the relation between the files
|
||||
handled by GNU <CODE>gettext</CODE> and the tools acting on these files.
|
||||
It is followed by a somewhat detailed explanations, which you should
|
||||
read while keeping an eye on the diagram. Having a clear understanding
|
||||
of these interrelations would surely help programmers, translators
|
||||
and maintainers.
|
||||
|
||||
</P>
|
||||
|
||||
<PRE>
|
||||
Original C Sources ---> PO mode ---> Marked C Sources ---.
|
||||
|
|
||||
.---------<--- GNU gettext Library |
|
||||
.--- make <---+ |
|
||||
| `---------<--------------------+-----------'
|
||||
| |
|
||||
| .-----<--- PACKAGE.pot <--- xgettext <---' .---<--- PO Compendium
|
||||
| | | ^
|
||||
| | `---. |
|
||||
| `---. +---> PO mode ---.
|
||||
| +----> msgmerge ------> LANG.pox --->--------' |
|
||||
| .---' |
|
||||
| | |
|
||||
| `-------------<---------------. |
|
||||
| +--- LANG.po <--- New LANG.pox <----'
|
||||
| .--- LANG.gmo <--- msgfmt <---'
|
||||
| |
|
||||
| `---> install ---> /.../LANG/PACKAGE.mo ---.
|
||||
| +---> "Hello world!"
|
||||
`-------> install ---> /.../bin/PROGRAM -------'
|
||||
</PRE>
|
||||
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
The indication <SAMP>`PO mode'</SAMP> appears in two places in this picture,
|
||||
and you may safely read it as merely meaning "hand editing", using
|
||||
any editor of your choice, really. However, for those of you being
|
||||
the lucky users of GNU Emacs, PO mode has been specifically created
|
||||
for providing a cozy environment for editing or modifying PO files.
|
||||
While editing a PO file, PO mode allows for the easy browsing of
|
||||
auxiliary and compendium PO files, as well as for following references into
|
||||
the set of C program sources from which PO files have been derived.
|
||||
It has a few special features, among which are the interactive marking
|
||||
of program strings as translatable, and the validation of PO files
|
||||
with easy repositioning to PO file lines showing errors.
|
||||
|
||||
</P>
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
As a programmer, the first step to bringing GNU <CODE>gettext</CODE>
|
||||
into your package is identifying, right in the C sources, those strings
|
||||
which are meant to be translatable, and those which are untranslatable.
|
||||
This tedious job can be done a little more comfortably using emacs PO
|
||||
mode, but you can use any means familiar to you for modifying your
|
||||
C sources. Beside this some other simple, standard changes are needed to
|
||||
properly initialize the translation library. See section <A HREF="gettext_3.html#SEC13">Preparing Program Sources</A>, for
|
||||
more information about all this.
|
||||
|
||||
</P>
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
For newly written software the strings of course can and should be
|
||||
marked while writing the it. The <CODE>gettext</CODE> approach makes this
|
||||
very easy. Simply put the following lines at the beginning of each file
|
||||
or in a central header file:
|
||||
|
||||
</P>
|
||||
|
||||
<PRE>
|
||||
#define _(String) (String)
|
||||
#define N_(String) (String)
|
||||
#define textdomain(Domain)
|
||||
#define bindtextdomain(Package, Directory)
|
||||
</PRE>
|
||||
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
Doing this allows you to prepare the sources for internationalization.
|
||||
Later when you feel ready for the step to use the <CODE>gettext</CODE> library
|
||||
simply remove these definitions, include <TT>`libintl.h'</TT> and link
|
||||
against <TT>`libintl.a'</TT>. That is all you have to change.
|
||||
|
||||
</P>
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
Once the C sources have been modified, the <CODE>xgettext</CODE> program
|
||||
is used to find and extract all translatable strings, and create an
|
||||
initial PO file out of all these. This <TT>`<VAR>package</VAR>.pot'</TT> file
|
||||
contains all original program strings. It has sets of pointers to
|
||||
exactly where in C sources each string is used. All translations
|
||||
are set to empty. The letter <KBD>t</KBD> in <TT>`.pot'</TT> marks this as
|
||||
a Template PO file, not yet oriented towards any particular language.
|
||||
See section <A HREF="gettext_4.html#SEC20">Invoking the <CODE>xgettext</CODE> Program</A>, for more details about how one calls the
|
||||
<CODE>xgettext</CODE> program. If you are <EM>really</EM> lazy, you might
|
||||
be interested at working a lot more right away, and preparing the
|
||||
whole distribution setup (see section <A HREF="gettext_10.html#SEC67">The Maintainer's View</A>). By doing so, you
|
||||
spare yourself typing the <CODE>xgettext</CODE> command, as <CODE>make</CODE>
|
||||
should now generate the proper things automatically for you!
|
||||
|
||||
</P>
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
The first time through, there is no <TT>`<VAR>lang</VAR>.po'</TT> yet, so the
|
||||
<CODE>msgmerge</CODE> step may be skipped and replaced by a mere copy of
|
||||
<TT>`<VAR>package</VAR>.pot'</TT> to <TT>`<VAR>lang</VAR>.pox'</TT>, where <VAR>lang</VAR>
|
||||
represents the target language.
|
||||
|
||||
</P>
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
Then comes the initial translation of messages. Translation in
|
||||
itself is a whole matter, still exclusively meant for humans,
|
||||
and whose complexity far overwhelms the level of this manual.
|
||||
Nevertheless, a few hints are given in some other chapter of this
|
||||
manual (see section <A HREF="gettext_9.html#SEC56">The Translator's View</A>). You will also find there indications
|
||||
about how to contact translating teams, or becoming part of them,
|
||||
for sharing your translating concerns with others who target the same
|
||||
native language.
|
||||
|
||||
</P>
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
While adding the translated messages into the <TT>`<VAR>lang</VAR>.pox'</TT>
|
||||
PO file, if you do not have GNU Emacs handy, you are on your own
|
||||
for ensuring that your efforts fully respect the PO file format, and quoting
|
||||
conventions (see section <A HREF="gettext_2.html#SEC9">The Format of PO Files</A>). This is surely not an impossible task,
|
||||
as this is the way many people have handled PO files already for Uniforum or
|
||||
Solaris. On the other hand, by using PO mode in GNU Emacs, most details
|
||||
of PO file format are taken care of for you, but you have to acquire
|
||||
some familiarity with PO mode itself. Besides main PO mode commands
|
||||
(see section <A HREF="gettext_2.html#SEC10">Main PO mode Commands</A>), you should know how to move between entries
|
||||
(see section <A HREF="gettext_2.html#SEC11">Entry Positioning</A>), and how to handle untranslated entries
|
||||
(see section <A HREF="gettext_5.html#SEC27">Untranslated Entries</A>).
|
||||
|
||||
</P>
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
If some common translations have already been saved into a compendium
|
||||
PO file, translators may use PO mode for initializing untranslated
|
||||
entries from the compendium, and also save selected translations into
|
||||
the compendium, updating it (see section <A HREF="gettext_4.html#SEC22">Using Translation Compendiums</A>). Compendium files
|
||||
are meant to be exchanged between members of a given translation team.
|
||||
|
||||
</P>
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
Programs, or packages of programs, are dynamic in nature: users write
|
||||
bug reports and suggestion for improvements, maintainers react by
|
||||
modifying programs in various ways. The fact that a package has
|
||||
already been internationalized should not make maintainers shy
|
||||
of adding new strings, or modifying strings already translated.
|
||||
They just do their job the best they can. For the Translation
|
||||
Project to work smoothly, it is important that maintainers do not
|
||||
carry translation concerns on their already loaded shoulders, and that
|
||||
translators be kept as free as possible of programmatic concerns.
|
||||
|
||||
</P>
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
The only concern maintainers should have is carefully marking new
|
||||
strings as translatable, when they should be, and do not otherwise
|
||||
worry about them being translated, as this will come in proper time.
|
||||
Consequently, when programs and their strings are adjusted in various
|
||||
ways by maintainers, and for matters usually unrelated to translation,
|
||||
<CODE>xgettext</CODE> would construct <TT>`<VAR>package</VAR>.pot'</TT> files which are
|
||||
evolving over time, so the translations carried by <TT>`<VAR>lang</VAR>.po'</TT>
|
||||
are slowly fading out of date.
|
||||
|
||||
</P>
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
It is important for translators (and even maintainers) to understand
|
||||
that package translation is a continuous process in the lifetime of a
|
||||
package, and not something which is done once and for all at the start.
|
||||
After an initial burst of translation activity for a given package,
|
||||
interventions are needed once in a while, because here and there,
|
||||
translated entries become obsolete, and new untranslated entries
|
||||
appear, needing translation.
|
||||
|
||||
</P>
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
The <CODE>msgmerge</CODE> program has the purpose of refreshing an already
|
||||
existing <TT>`<VAR>lang</VAR>.po'</TT> file, by comparing it with a newer
|
||||
<TT>`<VAR>package</VAR>.pot'</TT> template file, extracted by <CODE>xgettext</CODE>
|
||||
out of recent C sources. The refreshing operation adjusts all
|
||||
references to C source locations for strings, since these strings
|
||||
move as programs are modified. Also, <CODE>msgmerge</CODE> comments out as
|
||||
obsolete, in <TT>`<VAR>lang</VAR>.pox'</TT>, those already translated entries
|
||||
which are no longer used in the program sources (see section <A HREF="gettext_5.html#SEC28">Obsolete Entries</A>). It finally discovers new strings and inserts them in
|
||||
the resulting PO file as untranslated entries (see section <A HREF="gettext_5.html#SEC27">Untranslated Entries</A>). See section <A HREF="gettext_5.html#SEC24">Invoking the <CODE>msgmerge</CODE> Program</A>, for more information about what
|
||||
<CODE>msgmerge</CODE> really does.
|
||||
|
||||
</P>
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
Whatever route or means taken, the goal is to obtain an updated
|
||||
<TT>`<VAR>lang</VAR>.pox'</TT> file offering translations for all strings.
|
||||
When this is properly achieved, this file <TT>`<VAR>lang</VAR>.pox'</TT> may
|
||||
take the place of the previous official <TT>`<VAR>lang</VAR>.po'</TT> file.
|
||||
|
||||
</P>
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
The temporal mobility, or fluidity of PO files, is an integral part of
|
||||
the translation game, and should be well understood, and accepted.
|
||||
People resisting it will have a hard time participating in the
|
||||
Translation Project, or will give a hard time to other participants! In
|
||||
particular, maintainers should relax and include all available official
|
||||
PO files in their distributions, even if these have not recently been
|
||||
updated, without banging or otherwise trying to exert pressure on the
|
||||
translator teams to get the job done. The pressure should rather come
|
||||
from the community of users speaking a particular language, and
|
||||
maintainers should consider themselves fairly relieved of any concern
|
||||
about the adequacy of translation files. On the other hand, translators
|
||||
should reasonably try updating the PO files they are responsible for,
|
||||
while the package is undergoing pretest, prior to an official
|
||||
distribution.
|
||||
|
||||
</P>
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
Once the PO file is complete and dependable, the <CODE>msgfmt</CODE> program
|
||||
is used for turning the PO file into a machine-oriented format, which
|
||||
may yield efficient retrieval of translations by the programs of the
|
||||
package, whenever needed at runtime (see section <A HREF="gettext_6.html#SEC34">The Format of GNU MO Files</A>). See section <A HREF="gettext_6.html#SEC33">Invoking the <CODE>msgfmt</CODE> Program</A>, for more information about all modalities of execution
|
||||
for the <CODE>msgfmt</CODE> program.
|
||||
|
||||
</P>
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
Finally, the modified and marked C sources are compiled and linked
|
||||
with the GNU <CODE>gettext</CODE> library, usually through the operation of
|
||||
<CODE>make</CODE>, given a suitable <TT>`Makefile'</TT> exists for the project,
|
||||
and the resulting executable is installed somewhere users will find it.
|
||||
The MO files themselves should also be properly installed. Given the
|
||||
appropriate environment variables are set (see section <A HREF="gettext_7.html#SEC38">Magic for End Users</A>), the
|
||||
program should localize itself automatically, whenever it executes.
|
||||
|
||||
</P>
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
The remainder of this manual has the purpose of explaining in depth the various
|
||||
steps outlined above.
|
||||
|
||||
</P>
|
||||
<P><HR><P>
|
||||
<p>Go to the first, previous, <A HREF="gettext_2.html">next</A>, <A HREF="gettext_12.html">last</A> section, <A HREF="gettext_toc.html">table of contents</A>.
|
||||
</BODY>
|
||||
</HTML>
|
@ -1,656 +0,0 @@
|
||||
<HTML>
|
||||
<HEAD>
|
||||
<!-- This HTML file has been created by texi2html 1.54
|
||||
from gettext.texi on 25 January 1999 -->
|
||||
|
||||
<TITLE>GNU gettext utilities - The Maintainer's View</TITLE>
|
||||
<link href="gettext_11.html" rel=Next>
|
||||
<link href="gettext_9.html" rel=Previous>
|
||||
<link href="gettext_toc.html" rel=ToC>
|
||||
|
||||
</HEAD>
|
||||
<BODY>
|
||||
<p>Go to the <A HREF="gettext_1.html">first</A>, <A HREF="gettext_9.html">previous</A>, <A HREF="gettext_11.html">next</A>, <A HREF="gettext_12.html">last</A> section, <A HREF="gettext_toc.html">table of contents</A>.
|
||||
<P><HR><P>
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
<H1><A NAME="SEC67" HREF="gettext_toc.html#TOC67">The Maintainer's View</A></H1>
|
||||
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
The maintainer of a package has many responsibilities. One of them
|
||||
is ensuring that the package will install easily on many platforms,
|
||||
and that the magic we described earlier (see section <A HREF="gettext_7.html#SEC35">The User's View</A>) will work
|
||||
for installers and end users.
|
||||
|
||||
</P>
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
Of course, there are many possible ways by which GNU <CODE>gettext</CODE>
|
||||
might be integrated in a distribution, and this chapter does not cover
|
||||
them in all generality. Instead, it details one possible approach which
|
||||
is especially adequate for many free software distributions following GNU
|
||||
standards, or even better, Gnits standards, because GNU <CODE>gettext</CODE>
|
||||
is purposely for helping the internationalization of the whole GNU
|
||||
project, and as many other good free packages as possible. So, the
|
||||
maintainer's view presented here presumes that the package already has
|
||||
a <TT>`configure.in'</TT> file and uses GNU Autoconf.
|
||||
|
||||
</P>
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
Nevertheless, GNU <CODE>gettext</CODE> may surely be useful for free packages
|
||||
not following GNU standards and conventions, but the maintainers of such
|
||||
packages might have to show imagination and initiative in organizing
|
||||
their distributions so <CODE>gettext</CODE> work for them in all situations.
|
||||
There are surely many, out there.
|
||||
|
||||
</P>
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
Even if <CODE>gettext</CODE> methods are now stabilizing, slight adjustments
|
||||
might be needed between successive <CODE>gettext</CODE> versions, so you
|
||||
should ideally revise this chapter in subsequent releases, looking
|
||||
for changes.
|
||||
|
||||
</P>
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
<H2><A NAME="SEC68" HREF="gettext_toc.html#TOC68">Flat or Non-Flat Directory Structures</A></H2>
|
||||
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
Some free software packages are distributed as <CODE>tar</CODE> files which unpack
|
||||
in a single directory, these are said to be <STRONG>flat</STRONG> distributions.
|
||||
Other free software packages have a one level hierarchy of subdirectories, using
|
||||
for example a subdirectory named <TT>`doc/'</TT> for the Texinfo manual and
|
||||
man pages, another called <TT>`lib/'</TT> for holding functions meant to
|
||||
replace or complement C libraries, and a subdirectory <TT>`src/'</TT> for
|
||||
holding the proper sources for the package. These other distributions
|
||||
are said to be <STRONG>non-flat</STRONG>.
|
||||
|
||||
</P>
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
For now, we cannot say much about flat distributions. A flat
|
||||
directory structure has the disadvantage of increasing the difficulty
|
||||
of updating to a new version of GNU <CODE>gettext</CODE>. Also, if you have
|
||||
many PO files, this could somewhat pollute your single directory.
|
||||
In the GNU <CODE>gettext</CODE> distribution, the <TT>`misc/'</TT> directory
|
||||
contains a shell script named <TT>`combine-sh'</TT>. That script may
|
||||
be used for combining all the C files of the <TT>`intl/'</TT> directory
|
||||
into a pair of C files (one <TT>`.c'</TT> and one <TT>`.h'</TT>). Those two
|
||||
generated files would fit more easily in a flat directory structure,
|
||||
and you will then have to add these two files to your project.
|
||||
|
||||
</P>
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
Maybe because GNU <CODE>gettext</CODE> itself has a non-flat structure,
|
||||
we have more experience with this approach, and this is what will be
|
||||
described in the remaining of this chapter. Some maintainers might
|
||||
use this as an opportunity to unflatten their package structure.
|
||||
Only later, once gained more experience adapting GNU <CODE>gettext</CODE>
|
||||
to flat distributions, we might add some notes about how to proceed
|
||||
in flat situations.
|
||||
|
||||
</P>
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
<H2><A NAME="SEC69" HREF="gettext_toc.html#TOC69">Prerequisite Works</A></H2>
|
||||
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
There are some works which are required for using GNU <CODE>gettext</CODE>
|
||||
in one of your package. These works have some kind of generality
|
||||
that escape the point by point descriptions used in the remainder
|
||||
of this chapter. So, we describe them here.
|
||||
|
||||
</P>
|
||||
|
||||
<UL>
|
||||
<LI>
|
||||
|
||||
Before attempting to use you should install some other packages first.
|
||||
Ensure that recent versions of GNU <CODE>m4</CODE>, GNU Autoconf and GNU
|
||||
<CODE>gettext</CODE> are already installed at your site, and if not, proceed
|
||||
to do this first. If you got to install these things, beware that
|
||||
GNU <CODE>m4</CODE> must be fully installed before GNU Autoconf is even
|
||||
<EM>configured</EM>.
|
||||
|
||||
To further ease the task of a package maintainer the <CODE>automake</CODE>
|
||||
package was designed and implemented. GNU <CODE>gettext</CODE> now uses this
|
||||
tool and the <TT>`Makefile'</TT>s in the <TT>`intl/'</TT> and <TT>`po/'</TT>
|
||||
therefore know about all the goals necessary for using <CODE>automake</CODE>
|
||||
and <TT>`libintl'</TT> in one project.
|
||||
|
||||
Those four packages are only needed to you, as a maintainer; the
|
||||
installers of your own package and end users do not really need any of
|
||||
GNU <CODE>m4</CODE>, GNU Autoconf, GNU <CODE>gettext</CODE>, or GNU <CODE>automake</CODE>
|
||||
for successfully installing and running your package, with messages
|
||||
properly translated. But this is not completely true if you provide
|
||||
internationalized shell scripts within your own package: GNU
|
||||
<CODE>gettext</CODE> shall then be installed at the user site if the end users
|
||||
want to see the translation of shell script messages.
|
||||
|
||||
<LI>
|
||||
|
||||
Your package should use Autoconf and have a <TT>`configure.in'</TT> file.
|
||||
If it does not, you have to learn how. The Autoconf documentation
|
||||
is quite well written, it is a good idea that you print it and get
|
||||
familiar with it.
|
||||
|
||||
<LI>
|
||||
|
||||
Your C sources should have already been modified according to
|
||||
instructions given earlier in this manual. See section <A HREF="gettext_3.html#SEC13">Preparing Program Sources</A>.
|
||||
|
||||
<LI>
|
||||
|
||||
Your <TT>`po/'</TT> directory should receive all PO files submitted to you
|
||||
by the translator teams, each having <TT>`<VAR>ll</VAR>.po'</TT> as a name.
|
||||
This is not usually easy to get translation
|
||||
work done before your package gets internationalized and available!
|
||||
Since the cycle has to start somewhere, the easiest for the maintainer
|
||||
is to start with absolutely no PO files, and wait until various
|
||||
translator teams get interested in your package, and submit PO files.
|
||||
|
||||
</UL>
|
||||
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
It is worth adding here a few words about how the maintainer should
|
||||
ideally behave with PO files submissions. As a maintainer, your role is
|
||||
to authenticate the origin of the submission as being the representative
|
||||
of the appropriate translating teams of the Translation Project (forward
|
||||
the submission to <TT>`translation@iro.umontreal.ca'</TT> in case of doubt),
|
||||
to ensure that the PO file format is not severely broken and does not
|
||||
prevent successful installation, and for the rest, to merely to put these
|
||||
PO files in <TT>`po/'</TT> for distribution.
|
||||
|
||||
</P>
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
As a maintainer, you do not have to take on your shoulders the
|
||||
responsibility of checking if the translations are adequate or
|
||||
complete, and should avoid diving into linguistic matters. Translation
|
||||
teams drive themselves and are fully responsible of their linguistic
|
||||
choices for the Translation Project. Keep in mind that translator teams are <EM>not</EM>
|
||||
driven by maintainers. You can help by carefully redirecting all
|
||||
communications and reports from users about linguistic matters to the
|
||||
appropriate translation team, or explain users how to reach or join
|
||||
their team. The simplest might be to send them the <TT>`ABOUT-NLS'</TT> file.
|
||||
|
||||
</P>
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
Maintainers should <EM>never ever</EM> apply PO file bug reports
|
||||
themselves, short-cutting translation teams. If some translator has
|
||||
difficulty to get some of her points through her team, it should not be
|
||||
an issue for her to directly negotiate translations with maintainers.
|
||||
Teams ought to settle their problems themselves, if any. If you, as
|
||||
a maintainer, ever think there is a real problem with a team, please
|
||||
never try to <EM>solve</EM> a team's problem on your own.
|
||||
|
||||
</P>
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
<H2><A NAME="SEC70" HREF="gettext_toc.html#TOC70">Invoking the <CODE>gettextize</CODE> Program</A></H2>
|
||||
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
Some files are consistently and identically needed in every package
|
||||
internationalized through GNU <CODE>gettext</CODE>. As a matter of
|
||||
convenience, the <CODE>gettextize</CODE> program puts all these files right
|
||||
in your package. This program has the following synopsis:
|
||||
|
||||
</P>
|
||||
|
||||
<PRE>
|
||||
gettextize [ <VAR>option</VAR>... ] [ <VAR>directory</VAR> ]
|
||||
</PRE>
|
||||
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
and accepts the following options:
|
||||
|
||||
</P>
|
||||
<DL COMPACT>
|
||||
|
||||
<DT><SAMP>`-c'</SAMP>
|
||||
<DD>
|
||||
<DT><SAMP>`--copy'</SAMP>
|
||||
<DD>
|
||||
Copy the needed files instead of making symbolic links. Using links
|
||||
would allow the package to always use the latest <CODE>gettext</CODE> code
|
||||
available on the system, but it might disturb some mechanism the
|
||||
maintainer is used to apply to the sources. Because running
|
||||
<CODE>gettextize</CODE> is easy there shouldn't be problems with using copies.
|
||||
|
||||
<DT><SAMP>`-f'</SAMP>
|
||||
<DD>
|
||||
<DT><SAMP>`--force'</SAMP>
|
||||
<DD>
|
||||
Force replacement of files which already exist.
|
||||
|
||||
<DT><SAMP>`-h'</SAMP>
|
||||
<DD>
|
||||
<DT><SAMP>`--help'</SAMP>
|
||||
<DD>
|
||||
Display this help and exit.
|
||||
|
||||
<DT><SAMP>`--version'</SAMP>
|
||||
<DD>
|
||||
Output version information and exit.
|
||||
|
||||
</DL>
|
||||
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
If <VAR>directory</VAR> is given, this is the top level directory of a
|
||||
package to prepare for using GNU <CODE>gettext</CODE>. If not given, it
|
||||
is assumed that the current directory is the top level directory of
|
||||
such a package.
|
||||
|
||||
</P>
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
The program <CODE>gettextize</CODE> provides the following files. However,
|
||||
no existing file will be replaced unless the option <CODE>--force</CODE>
|
||||
(<CODE>-f</CODE>) is specified.
|
||||
|
||||
</P>
|
||||
|
||||
<OL>
|
||||
<LI>
|
||||
|
||||
The <TT>`ABOUT-NLS'</TT> file is copied in the main directory of your package,
|
||||
the one being at the top level. This file gives the main indications
|
||||
about how to install and use the Native Language Support features
|
||||
of your program. You might elect to use a more recent copy of this
|
||||
<TT>`ABOUT-NLS'</TT> file than the one provided through <CODE>gettextize</CODE>,
|
||||
if you have one handy. You may also fetch a more recent copy of file
|
||||
<TT>`ABOUT-NLS'</TT> from Translation Project sites, and from most GNU
|
||||
archive sites.
|
||||
|
||||
<LI>
|
||||
|
||||
A <TT>`po/'</TT> directory is created for eventually holding
|
||||
all translation files, but initially only containing the file
|
||||
<TT>`po/Makefile.in.in'</TT> from the GNU <CODE>gettext</CODE> distribution.
|
||||
(beware the double <SAMP>`.in'</SAMP> in the file name). If the <TT>`po/'</TT>
|
||||
directory already exists, it will be preserved along with the files
|
||||
it contains, and only <TT>`Makefile.in.in'</TT> will be overwritten.
|
||||
|
||||
<LI>
|
||||
|
||||
A <TT>`intl/'</TT> directory is created and filled with most of the files
|
||||
originally in the <TT>`intl/'</TT> directory of the GNU <CODE>gettext</CODE>
|
||||
distribution. Also, if option <CODE>--force</CODE> (<CODE>-f</CODE>) is given,
|
||||
the <TT>`intl/'</TT> directory is emptied first.
|
||||
|
||||
</OL>
|
||||
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
If your site support symbolic links, <CODE>gettextize</CODE> will not
|
||||
actually copy the files into your package, but establish symbolic
|
||||
links instead. This avoids duplicating the disk space needed in
|
||||
all packages. Merely using the <SAMP>`-h'</SAMP> option while creating the
|
||||
<CODE>tar</CODE> archive of your distribution will resolve each link by an
|
||||
actual copy in the distribution archive. So, to insist, you really
|
||||
should use <SAMP>`-h'</SAMP> option with <CODE>tar</CODE> within your <CODE>dist</CODE>
|
||||
goal of your main <TT>`Makefile.in'</TT>.
|
||||
|
||||
</P>
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
It is interesting to understand that most new files for supporting
|
||||
GNU <CODE>gettext</CODE> facilities in one package go in <TT>`intl/'</TT>
|
||||
and <TT>`po/'</TT> subdirectories. One distinction between these two
|
||||
directories is that <TT>`intl/'</TT> is meant to be completely identical
|
||||
in all packages using GNU <CODE>gettext</CODE>, while all newly created
|
||||
files, which have to be different, go into <TT>`po/'</TT>. There is a
|
||||
common <TT>`Makefile.in.in'</TT> in <TT>`po/'</TT>, because the <TT>`po/'</TT>
|
||||
directory needs its own <TT>`Makefile'</TT>, and it has been designed so
|
||||
it can be identical in all packages.
|
||||
|
||||
</P>
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
<H2><A NAME="SEC71" HREF="gettext_toc.html#TOC71">Files You Must Create or Alter</A></H2>
|
||||
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
Besides files which are automatically added through <CODE>gettextize</CODE>,
|
||||
there are many files needing revision for properly interacting with
|
||||
GNU <CODE>gettext</CODE>. If you are closely following GNU standards for
|
||||
Makefile engineering and auto-configuration, the adaptations should
|
||||
be easier to achieve. Here is a point by point description of the
|
||||
changes needed in each.
|
||||
|
||||
</P>
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
So, here comes a list of files, each one followed by a description of
|
||||
all alterations it needs. Many examples are taken out from the GNU
|
||||
<CODE>gettext</CODE> 0.10.35 distribution itself. You may indeed
|
||||
refer to the source code of the GNU <CODE>gettext</CODE> package, as it
|
||||
is intended to be a good example and master implementation for using
|
||||
its own functionality.
|
||||
|
||||
</P>
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
<H3><A NAME="SEC72" HREF="gettext_toc.html#TOC72"><TT>`POTFILES.in'</TT> in <TT>`po/'</TT></A></H3>
|
||||
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
The <TT>`po/'</TT> directory should receive a file named
|
||||
<TT>`POTFILES.in'</TT>. This file tells which files, among all program
|
||||
sources, have marked strings needing translation. Here is an example
|
||||
of such a file:
|
||||
|
||||
</P>
|
||||
|
||||
<PRE>
|
||||
# List of source files containing translatable strings.
|
||||
# Copyright (C) 1995 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
|
||||
|
||||
# Common library files
|
||||
lib/error.c
|
||||
lib/getopt.c
|
||||
lib/xmalloc.c
|
||||
|
||||
# Package source files
|
||||
src/gettextp.c
|
||||
src/msgfmt.c
|
||||
src/xgettext.c
|
||||
</PRE>
|
||||
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
Dashed comments and white lines are ignored. All other lines
|
||||
list those source files containing strings marked for translation
|
||||
(see section <A HREF="gettext_3.html#SEC15">How Marks Appears in Sources</A>), in a notation relative to the top level
|
||||
of your whole distribution, rather than the location of the
|
||||
<TT>`POTFILES.in'</TT> file itself.
|
||||
|
||||
</P>
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
<H3><A NAME="SEC73" HREF="gettext_toc.html#TOC73"><TT>`configure.in'</TT> at top level</A></H3>
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
<OL>
|
||||
<LI>Declare the package and version.
|
||||
|
||||
This is done by a set of lines like these:
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
<PRE>
|
||||
PACKAGE=gettext
|
||||
VERSION=0.10.35
|
||||
AC_DEFINE_UNQUOTED(PACKAGE, "$PACKAGE")
|
||||
AC_DEFINE_UNQUOTED(VERSION, "$VERSION")
|
||||
AC_SUBST(PACKAGE)
|
||||
AC_SUBST(VERSION)
|
||||
</PRE>
|
||||
|
||||
Of course, you replace <SAMP>`gettext'</SAMP> with the name of your package,
|
||||
and <SAMP>`0.10.35'</SAMP> by its version numbers, exactly as they
|
||||
should appear in the packaged <CODE>tar</CODE> file name of your distribution
|
||||
(<TT>`gettext-0.10.35.tar.gz'</TT>, here).
|
||||
|
||||
<LI>Declare the available translations.
|
||||
|
||||
This is done by defining <CODE>ALL_LINGUAS</CODE> to the white separated,
|
||||
quoted list of available languages, in a single line, like this:
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
<PRE>
|
||||
ALL_LINGUAS="de fr"
|
||||
</PRE>
|
||||
|
||||
This example means that German and French PO files are available, so
|
||||
that these languages are currently supported by your package. If you
|
||||
want to further restrict, at installation time, the set of installed
|
||||
languages, this should not be done by modifying <CODE>ALL_LINGUAS</CODE> in
|
||||
<TT>`configure.in'</TT>, but rather by using the <CODE>LINGUAS</CODE> environment
|
||||
variable (see section <A HREF="gettext_7.html#SEC37">Magic for Installers</A>).
|
||||
|
||||
<LI>Check for internationalization support.
|
||||
|
||||
Here is the main <CODE>m4</CODE> macro for triggering internationalization
|
||||
support. Just add this line to <TT>`configure.in'</TT>:
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
<PRE>
|
||||
AM_GNU_GETTEXT
|
||||
</PRE>
|
||||
|
||||
This call is purposely simple, even if it generates a lot of configure
|
||||
time checking and actions.
|
||||
|
||||
<LI>Have output files created.
|
||||
|
||||
The <CODE>AC_OUTPUT</CODE> directive, at the end of your <TT>`configure.in'</TT>
|
||||
file, needs to be modified in two ways:
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
<PRE>
|
||||
AC_OUTPUT([<VAR>existing configuration files</VAR> intl/Makefile po/Makefile.in],
|
||||
<VAR>existing additional actions</VAR>])
|
||||
</PRE>
|
||||
|
||||
The modification to the first argument to <CODE>AC_OUTPUT</CODE> asks
|
||||
for substitution in the <TT>`intl/'</TT> and <TT>`po/'</TT> directories.
|
||||
Note the <SAMP>`.in'</SAMP> suffix used for <TT>`po/'</TT> only. This is because
|
||||
the distributed file is really <TT>`po/Makefile.in.in'</TT>.
|
||||
|
||||
</OL>
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
<H3><A NAME="SEC74" HREF="gettext_toc.html#TOC74"><TT>`aclocal.m4'</TT> at top level</A></H3>
|
||||
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
If you do not have an <TT>`aclocal.m4'</TT> file in your distribution,
|
||||
the simplest is taking a copy of <TT>`aclocal.m4'</TT> from
|
||||
GNU <CODE>gettext</CODE>. But to be precise, you only need macros
|
||||
<CODE>AM_LC_MESSAGES</CODE>, <CODE>AM_WITH_NLS</CODE> and <CODE>AM_GNU_GETTEXT</CODE>,
|
||||
and <CODE>AM_PATH_PROG_WITH_TEST</CODE>, which is called by <CODE>AM_WITH_NLS</CODE>,
|
||||
so you may use an editor and remove macros you do not need.
|
||||
|
||||
</P>
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
If you already have an <TT>`aclocal.m4'</TT> file, then you will have
|
||||
to merge the said macros into your <TT>`aclocal.m4'</TT>. Note that if
|
||||
you are upgrading from a previous release of GNU <CODE>gettext</CODE>, you
|
||||
should most probably <EM>replace</EM> the said macros, as they usually
|
||||
change a little from one release of GNU <CODE>gettext</CODE> to the next.
|
||||
Their contents may vary as we get more experience with strange systems
|
||||
out there.
|
||||
|
||||
</P>
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
These macros check for the internationalization support functions
|
||||
and related informations. Hopefully, once stabilized, these macros
|
||||
might be integrated in the standard Autoconf set, because this
|
||||
piece of <CODE>m4</CODE> code will be the same for all projects using GNU
|
||||
<CODE>gettext</CODE>.
|
||||
|
||||
</P>
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
<H3><A NAME="SEC75" HREF="gettext_toc.html#TOC75"><TT>`acconfig.h'</TT> at top level</A></H3>
|
||||
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
If you do not have an <TT>`acconfig.h'</TT> file in your distribution, the
|
||||
simplest is use take a copy of <TT>`acconfig.h'</TT> from GNU
|
||||
<CODE>gettext</CODE>. But to be precise, you only need the lines and comments
|
||||
for <CODE>ENABLE_NLS</CODE>, <CODE>HAVE_CATGETS</CODE>, <CODE>HAVE_GETTEXT</CODE> and
|
||||
<CODE>HAVE_LC_MESSAGES</CODE>, <CODE>HAVE_STPCPY</CODE>, <CODE>PACKAGE</CODE> and
|
||||
<CODE>VERSION</CODE>, so you may use an editor and remove everything else. If
|
||||
you already have an <TT>`acconfig.h'</TT> file, then you should merge the
|
||||
said definitions into your <TT>`acconfig.h'</TT>.
|
||||
|
||||
</P>
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
<H3><A NAME="SEC76" HREF="gettext_toc.html#TOC76"><TT>`Makefile.in'</TT> at top level</A></H3>
|
||||
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
Here are a few modifications you need to make to your main, top-level
|
||||
<TT>`Makefile.in'</TT> file.
|
||||
|
||||
</P>
|
||||
|
||||
<OL>
|
||||
<LI>
|
||||
|
||||
Add the following lines near the beginning of your <TT>`Makefile.in'</TT>,
|
||||
so the <SAMP>`dist:'</SAMP> goal will work properly (as explained further down):
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
<PRE>
|
||||
PACKAGE = @PACKAGE@
|
||||
VERSION = @VERSION@
|
||||
</PRE>
|
||||
|
||||
<LI>
|
||||
|
||||
Add file <TT>`ABOUT-NLS'</TT> to the <CODE>DISTFILES</CODE> definition, so the file gets
|
||||
distributed.
|
||||
|
||||
<LI>
|
||||
|
||||
Wherever you process subdirectories in your <TT>`Makefile.in'</TT>, be sure
|
||||
you also process dir subdirectories <SAMP>`intl'</SAMP> and <SAMP>`po'</SAMP>. Special
|
||||
rules in the <TT>`Makefiles'</TT> take care for the case where no
|
||||
internationalization is wanted.
|
||||
|
||||
If you are using Makefiles, either generated by automake, or hand-written
|
||||
so they carefully follow the GNU coding standards, the effected goals for
|
||||
which the new subdirectories must be handled include <SAMP>`installdirs'</SAMP>,
|
||||
<SAMP>`install'</SAMP>, <SAMP>`uninstall'</SAMP>, <SAMP>`clean'</SAMP>, <SAMP>`distclean'</SAMP>.
|
||||
|
||||
Here is an example of a canonical order of processing. In this
|
||||
example, we also define <CODE>SUBDIRS</CODE> in <CODE>Makefile.in</CODE> for it
|
||||
to be further used in the <SAMP>`dist:'</SAMP> goal.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
<PRE>
|
||||
SUBDIRS = doc lib @INTLSUB@ src @POSUB@
|
||||
</PRE>
|
||||
|
||||
that you will have to adapt to your own package.
|
||||
|
||||
<LI>
|
||||
|
||||
A delicate point is the <SAMP>`dist:'</SAMP> goal, as both
|
||||
<TT>`intl/Makefile'</TT> and <TT>`po/Makefile'</TT> will later assume that the
|
||||
proper directory has been set up from the main <TT>`Makefile'</TT>. Here is
|
||||
an example at what the <SAMP>`dist:'</SAMP> goal might look like:
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
<PRE>
|
||||
distdir = $(PACKAGE)-$(VERSION)
|
||||
dist: Makefile
|
||||
rm -fr $(distdir)
|
||||
mkdir $(distdir)
|
||||
chmod 777 $(distdir)
|
||||
for file in $(DISTFILES); do \
|
||||
ln $$file $(distdir) 2>/dev/null || cp -p $$file $(distdir); \
|
||||
done
|
||||
for subdir in $(SUBDIRS); do \
|
||||
mkdir $(distdir)/$$subdir || exit 1; \
|
||||
chmod 777 $(distdir)/$$subdir; \
|
||||
(cd $$subdir && $(MAKE) $@) || exit 1; \
|
||||
done
|
||||
tar chozf $(distdir).tar.gz $(distdir)
|
||||
rm -fr $(distdir)
|
||||
</PRE>
|
||||
|
||||
</OL>
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
<H3><A NAME="SEC77" HREF="gettext_toc.html#TOC77"><TT>`Makefile.in'</TT> in <TT>`src/'</TT></A></H3>
|
||||
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
Some of the modifications made in the main <TT>`Makefile.in'</TT> will
|
||||
also be needed in the <TT>`Makefile.in'</TT> from your package sources,
|
||||
which we assume here to be in the <TT>`src/'</TT> subdirectory. Here are
|
||||
all the modifications needed in <TT>`src/Makefile.in'</TT>:
|
||||
|
||||
</P>
|
||||
|
||||
<OL>
|
||||
<LI>
|
||||
|
||||
In view of the <SAMP>`dist:'</SAMP> goal, you should have these lines near the
|
||||
beginning of <TT>`src/Makefile.in'</TT>:
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
<PRE>
|
||||
PACKAGE = @PACKAGE@
|
||||
VERSION = @VERSION@
|
||||
</PRE>
|
||||
|
||||
<LI>
|
||||
|
||||
If not done already, you should guarantee that <CODE>top_srcdir</CODE>
|
||||
gets defined. This will serve for <CODE>cpp</CODE> include files. Just add
|
||||
the line:
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
<PRE>
|
||||
top_srcdir = @top_srcdir@
|
||||
</PRE>
|
||||
|
||||
<LI>
|
||||
|
||||
You might also want to define <CODE>subdir</CODE> as <SAMP>`src'</SAMP>, later
|
||||
allowing for almost uniform <SAMP>`dist:'</SAMP> goals in all your
|
||||
<TT>`Makefile.in'</TT>. At list, the <SAMP>`dist:'</SAMP> goal below assume that
|
||||
you used:
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
<PRE>
|
||||
subdir = src
|
||||
</PRE>
|
||||
|
||||
<LI>
|
||||
|
||||
You should ensure that the final linking will use <CODE>@INTLLIBS@</CODE> as
|
||||
a library. An easy way to achieve this is to manage that it gets into
|
||||
<CODE>LIBS</CODE>, like this:
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
<PRE>
|
||||
LIBS = @INTLLIBS@ @LIBS@
|
||||
</PRE>
|
||||
|
||||
In most packages internationalized with GNU <CODE>gettext</CODE>, one will
|
||||
find a directory <TT>`lib/'</TT> in which a library containing some helper
|
||||
functions will be build. (You need at least the few functions which the
|
||||
GNU <CODE>gettext</CODE> Library itself needs.) However some of the functions
|
||||
in the <TT>`lib/'</TT> also give messages to the user which of course should be
|
||||
translated, too. Taking care of this it is not enough to place the support
|
||||
library (say <TT>`libsupport.a'</TT>) just between the <CODE>@INTLLIBS@</CODE>
|
||||
and <CODE>@LIBS@</CODE> in the above example. Instead one has to write this:
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
<PRE>
|
||||
LIBS = ../lib/libsupport.a @INTLLIBS@ ../lib/libsupport.a @LIBS@
|
||||
</PRE>
|
||||
|
||||
<LI>
|
||||
|
||||
You should also ensure that directory <TT>`intl/'</TT> will be searched for
|
||||
C preprocessor include files in all circumstances. So, you have to
|
||||
manage so both <SAMP>`-I../intl'</SAMP> and <SAMP>`-I$(top_srcdir)/intl'</SAMP> will
|
||||
be given to the C compiler.
|
||||
|
||||
<LI>
|
||||
|
||||
Your <SAMP>`dist:'</SAMP> goal has to conform with others. Here is a
|
||||
reasonable definition for it:
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
<PRE>
|
||||
distdir = ../$(PACKAGE)-$(VERSION)/$(subdir)
|
||||
dist: Makefile $(DISTFILES)
|
||||
for file in $(DISTFILES); do \
|
||||
ln $$file $(distdir) 2>/dev/null || cp -p $$file $(distdir); \
|
||||
done
|
||||
</PRE>
|
||||
|
||||
</OL>
|
||||
|
||||
<P><HR><P>
|
||||
<p>Go to the <A HREF="gettext_1.html">first</A>, <A HREF="gettext_9.html">previous</A>, <A HREF="gettext_11.html">next</A>, <A HREF="gettext_12.html">last</A> section, <A HREF="gettext_toc.html">table of contents</A>.
|
||||
</BODY>
|
||||
</HTML>
|
@ -1,164 +0,0 @@
|
||||
<HTML>
|
||||
<HEAD>
|
||||
<!-- This HTML file has been created by texi2html 1.54
|
||||
from gettext.texi on 25 January 1999 -->
|
||||
|
||||
<TITLE>GNU gettext utilities - Concluding Remarks</TITLE>
|
||||
<link href="gettext_12.html" rel=Next>
|
||||
<link href="gettext_10.html" rel=Previous>
|
||||
<link href="gettext_toc.html" rel=ToC>
|
||||
|
||||
</HEAD>
|
||||
<BODY>
|
||||
<p>Go to the <A HREF="gettext_1.html">first</A>, <A HREF="gettext_10.html">previous</A>, <A HREF="gettext_12.html">next</A>, <A HREF="gettext_12.html">last</A> section, <A HREF="gettext_toc.html">table of contents</A>.
|
||||
<P><HR><P>
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
<H1><A NAME="SEC78" HREF="gettext_toc.html#TOC78">Concluding Remarks</A></H1>
|
||||
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
We would like to conclude this GNU <CODE>gettext</CODE> manual by presenting
|
||||
an history of the Translation Project so far. We finally give
|
||||
a few pointers for those who want to do further research or readings
|
||||
about Native Language Support matters.
|
||||
|
||||
</P>
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
<H2><A NAME="SEC79" HREF="gettext_toc.html#TOC79">History of GNU <CODE>gettext</CODE></A></H2>
|
||||
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
Internationalization concerns and algorithms have been informally
|
||||
and casually discussed for years in GNU, sometimes around GNU
|
||||
<CODE>libc</CODE>, maybe around the incoming <CODE>Hurd</CODE>, or otherwise
|
||||
(nobody clearly remembers). And even then, when the work started for
|
||||
real, this was somewhat independently of these previous discussions.
|
||||
|
||||
</P>
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
This all began in July 1994, when Patrick D'Cruze had the idea and
|
||||
initiative of internationalizing version 3.9.2 of GNU <CODE>fileutils</CODE>.
|
||||
He then asked Jim Meyering, the maintainer, how to get those changes
|
||||
folded into an official release. That first draft was full of
|
||||
<CODE>#ifdef</CODE>s and somewhat disconcerting, and Jim wanted to find
|
||||
nicer ways. Patrick and Jim shared some tries and experimentations
|
||||
in this area. Then, feeling that this might eventually have a deeper
|
||||
impact on GNU, Jim wanted to know what standards were, and contacted
|
||||
Richard Stallman, who very quickly and verbally described an overall
|
||||
design for what was meant to become <CODE>glocale</CODE>, at that time.
|
||||
|
||||
</P>
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
Jim implemented <CODE>glocale</CODE> and got a lot of exhausting feedback
|
||||
from Patrick and Richard, of course, but also from Mitchum DSouza
|
||||
(who wrote a <CODE>catgets</CODE>-like package), Roland McGrath, maybe David
|
||||
MacKenzie, Fran@,{c}ois Pinard, and Paul Eggert, all pushing and
|
||||
pulling in various directions, not always compatible, to the extent
|
||||
that after a couple of test releases, <CODE>glocale</CODE> was torn apart.
|
||||
|
||||
</P>
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
While Jim took some distance and time and became dad for a second
|
||||
time, Roland wanted to get GNU <CODE>libc</CODE> internationalized, and
|
||||
got Ulrich Drepper involved in that project. Instead of starting
|
||||
from <CODE>glocale</CODE>, Ulrich rewrote something from scratch, but
|
||||
more conformant to the set of guidelines who emerged out of the
|
||||
<CODE>glocale</CODE> effort. Then, Ulrich got people from the previous
|
||||
forum to involve themselves into this new project, and the switch
|
||||
from <CODE>glocale</CODE> to what was first named <CODE>msgutils</CODE>, renamed
|
||||
<CODE>nlsutils</CODE>, and later <CODE>gettext</CODE>, became officially accepted
|
||||
by Richard in May 1995 or so.
|
||||
|
||||
</P>
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
Let's summarize by saying that Ulrich Drepper wrote GNU <CODE>gettext</CODE>
|
||||
in April 1995. The first official release of the package, including
|
||||
PO mode, occurred in July 1995, and was numbered 0.7. Other people
|
||||
contributed to the effort by providing a discussion forum around
|
||||
Ulrich, writing little pieces of code, or testing. These are quoted
|
||||
in the <CODE>THANKS</CODE> file which comes with the GNU <CODE>gettext</CODE>
|
||||
distribution.
|
||||
|
||||
</P>
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
While this was being done, Fran@,{c}ois adapted half a dozen of
|
||||
GNU packages to <CODE>glocale</CODE> first, then later to <CODE>gettext</CODE>,
|
||||
putting them in pretest, so providing along the way an effective
|
||||
user environment for fine tuning the evolving tools. He also took
|
||||
the responsibility of organizing and coordinating the Translation
|
||||
Project. After nearly a year of informal exchanges between people from
|
||||
many countries, translator teams started to exist in May 1995, through
|
||||
the creation and support by Patrick D'Cruze of twenty unmoderated
|
||||
mailing lists for that many native languages, and two moderated
|
||||
lists: one for reaching all teams at once, the other for reaching
|
||||
all willing maintainers of internationalized free software packages.
|
||||
|
||||
</P>
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
Fran@,{c}ois also wrote PO mode in June 1995 with the collaboration
|
||||
of Greg McGary, as a kind of contribution to Ulrich's package.
|
||||
He also gave a hand with the GNU <CODE>gettext</CODE> Texinfo manual.
|
||||
|
||||
</P>
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
<H2><A NAME="SEC80" HREF="gettext_toc.html#TOC80">Related Readings</A></H2>
|
||||
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
Eugene H. Dorr (<TT>`dorre@well.com'</TT>) maintains an interesting
|
||||
bibliography on internationalization matters, called
|
||||
<CITE>Internationalization Reference List</CITE>, which is available as:
|
||||
|
||||
<PRE>
|
||||
ftp://ftp.ora.com/pub/examples/nutshell/ujip/doc/i18n-books.txt
|
||||
</PRE>
|
||||
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
Michael Gschwind (<TT>`mike@vlsivie.tuwien.ac.at'</TT>) maintains a
|
||||
Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ) list, entitled <CITE>Programming for
|
||||
Internationalisation</CITE>. This FAQ discusses writing programs which
|
||||
can handle different language conventions, character sets, etc.;
|
||||
and is applicable to all character set encodings, with particular
|
||||
emphasis on ISO 8859-1. It is regularly published in Usenet
|
||||
groups <TT>`comp.unix.questions'</TT>, <TT>`comp.std.internat'</TT>,
|
||||
<TT>`comp.software.international'</TT>, <TT>`comp.lang.c'</TT>,
|
||||
<TT>`comp.windows.x'</TT>, <TT>`comp.std.c'</TT>, <TT>`comp.answers'</TT>
|
||||
and <TT>`news.answers'</TT>. The home location of this document is:
|
||||
|
||||
<PRE>
|
||||
ftp://ftp.vlsivie.tuwien.ac.at/pub/8bit/ISO-programming
|
||||
</PRE>
|
||||
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
Patrick D'Cruze (<TT>`pdcruze@li.org'</TT>) wrote a tutorial about NLS
|
||||
matters, and Jochen Hein (<TT>`Hein@student.tu-clausthal.de'</TT>) took
|
||||
over the responsibility of maintaining it. It may be found as:
|
||||
|
||||
<PRE>
|
||||
ftp://sunsite.unc.edu/pub/Linux/utils/nls/catalogs/Incoming/...
|
||||
...locale-tutorial-0.8.txt.gz
|
||||
</PRE>
|
||||
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
This site is mirrored in:
|
||||
|
||||
<PRE>
|
||||
ftp://ftp.ibp.fr/pub/linux/sunsite/
|
||||
</PRE>
|
||||
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
A French version of the same tutorial should be findable at:
|
||||
|
||||
<PRE>
|
||||
ftp://ftp.ibp.fr/pub/linux/french/docs/
|
||||
</PRE>
|
||||
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
together with French translations of many Linux-related documents.
|
||||
|
||||
</P>
|
||||
<P><HR><P>
|
||||
<p>Go to the <A HREF="gettext_1.html">first</A>, <A HREF="gettext_10.html">previous</A>, <A HREF="gettext_12.html">next</A>, <A HREF="gettext_12.html">last</A> section, <A HREF="gettext_toc.html">table of contents</A>.
|
||||
</BODY>
|
||||
</HTML>
|
@ -1,448 +0,0 @@
|
||||
<HTML>
|
||||
<HEAD>
|
||||
<!-- This HTML file has been created by texi2html 1.54
|
||||
from gettext.texi on 25 January 1999 -->
|
||||
|
||||
<TITLE>GNU gettext utilities - Country Codes</TITLE>
|
||||
<link href="gettext_11.html" rel=Previous>
|
||||
<link href="gettext_toc.html" rel=ToC>
|
||||
|
||||
</HEAD>
|
||||
<BODY>
|
||||
<p>Go to the <A HREF="gettext_1.html">first</A>, <A HREF="gettext_11.html">previous</A>, next, last section, <A HREF="gettext_toc.html">table of contents</A>.
|
||||
<P><HR><P>
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
<H1><A NAME="SEC81" HREF="gettext_toc.html#TOC81">Country Codes</A></H1>
|
||||
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
The ISO 639 standard defines two character codes for many countries.
|
||||
All abbreviations for countries or languages used in the Translation
|
||||
Project should come from this standard.
|
||||
|
||||
</P>
|
||||
<DL COMPACT>
|
||||
|
||||
<DT><SAMP>`aa'</SAMP>
|
||||
<DD>
|
||||
Afar.
|
||||
<DT><SAMP>`ab'</SAMP>
|
||||
<DD>
|
||||
Abkhazian.
|
||||
<DT><SAMP>`af'</SAMP>
|
||||
<DD>
|
||||
Afrikaans.
|
||||
<DT><SAMP>`am'</SAMP>
|
||||
<DD>
|
||||
Amharic.
|
||||
<DT><SAMP>`ar'</SAMP>
|
||||
<DD>
|
||||
Arabic.
|
||||
<DT><SAMP>`as'</SAMP>
|
||||
<DD>
|
||||
Assamese.
|
||||
<DT><SAMP>`ay'</SAMP>
|
||||
<DD>
|
||||
Aymara.
|
||||
<DT><SAMP>`az'</SAMP>
|
||||
<DD>
|
||||
Azerbaijani.
|
||||
<DT><SAMP>`ba'</SAMP>
|
||||
<DD>
|
||||
Bashkir.
|
||||
<DT><SAMP>`be'</SAMP>
|
||||
<DD>
|
||||
Byelorussian.
|
||||
<DT><SAMP>`bg'</SAMP>
|
||||
<DD>
|
||||
Bulgarian.
|
||||
<DT><SAMP>`bh'</SAMP>
|
||||
<DD>
|
||||
Bihari.
|
||||
<DT><SAMP>`bi'</SAMP>
|
||||
<DD>
|
||||
Bislama.
|
||||
<DT><SAMP>`bn'</SAMP>
|
||||
<DD>
|
||||
Bengali; Bangla.
|
||||
<DT><SAMP>`bo'</SAMP>
|
||||
<DD>
|
||||
Tibetan.
|
||||
<DT><SAMP>`br'</SAMP>
|
||||
<DD>
|
||||
Breton.
|
||||
<DT><SAMP>`ca'</SAMP>
|
||||
<DD>
|
||||
Catalan.
|
||||
<DT><SAMP>`co'</SAMP>
|
||||
<DD>
|
||||
Corsican.
|
||||
<DT><SAMP>`cs'</SAMP>
|
||||
<DD>
|
||||
Czech.
|
||||
<DT><SAMP>`cy'</SAMP>
|
||||
<DD>
|
||||
Welsh.
|
||||
<DT><SAMP>`da'</SAMP>
|
||||
<DD>
|
||||
Danish.
|
||||
<DT><SAMP>`de'</SAMP>
|
||||
<DD>
|
||||
German.
|
||||
<DT><SAMP>`dz'</SAMP>
|
||||
<DD>
|
||||
Bhutani.
|
||||
<DT><SAMP>`el'</SAMP>
|
||||
<DD>
|
||||
Greek.
|
||||
<DT><SAMP>`en'</SAMP>
|
||||
<DD>
|
||||
English.
|
||||
<DT><SAMP>`eo'</SAMP>
|
||||
<DD>
|
||||
Esperanto.
|
||||
<DT><SAMP>`es'</SAMP>
|
||||
<DD>
|
||||
Spanish.
|
||||
<DT><SAMP>`et'</SAMP>
|
||||
<DD>
|
||||
Estonian.
|
||||
<DT><SAMP>`eu'</SAMP>
|
||||
<DD>
|
||||
Basque.
|
||||
<DT><SAMP>`fa'</SAMP>
|
||||
<DD>
|
||||
Persian.
|
||||
<DT><SAMP>`fi'</SAMP>
|
||||
<DD>
|
||||
Finnish.
|
||||
<DT><SAMP>`fj'</SAMP>
|
||||
<DD>
|
||||
Fiji.
|
||||
<DT><SAMP>`fo'</SAMP>
|
||||
<DD>
|
||||
Faroese.
|
||||
<DT><SAMP>`fr'</SAMP>
|
||||
<DD>
|
||||
French.
|
||||
<DT><SAMP>`fy'</SAMP>
|
||||
<DD>
|
||||
Frisian.
|
||||
<DT><SAMP>`ga'</SAMP>
|
||||
<DD>
|
||||
Irish.
|
||||
<DT><SAMP>`gd'</SAMP>
|
||||
<DD>
|
||||
Scots Gaelic.
|
||||
<DT><SAMP>`gl'</SAMP>
|
||||
<DD>
|
||||
Galician.
|
||||
<DT><SAMP>`gn'</SAMP>
|
||||
<DD>
|
||||
Guarani.
|
||||
<DT><SAMP>`gu'</SAMP>
|
||||
<DD>
|
||||
Gujarati.
|
||||
<DT><SAMP>`ha'</SAMP>
|
||||
<DD>
|
||||
Hausa.
|
||||
<DT><SAMP>`he'</SAMP>
|
||||
<DD>
|
||||
Hebrew (formerly iw).
|
||||
<DT><SAMP>`hi'</SAMP>
|
||||
<DD>
|
||||
Hindi.
|
||||
<DT><SAMP>`hr'</SAMP>
|
||||
<DD>
|
||||
Croatian.
|
||||
<DT><SAMP>`hu'</SAMP>
|
||||
<DD>
|
||||
Hungarian.
|
||||
<DT><SAMP>`hy'</SAMP>
|
||||
<DD>
|
||||
Armenian.
|
||||
<DT><SAMP>`ia'</SAMP>
|
||||
<DD>
|
||||
Interlingua.
|
||||
<DT><SAMP>`id'</SAMP>
|
||||
<DD>
|
||||
Indonesian (formerly in).
|
||||
<DT><SAMP>`ie'</SAMP>
|
||||
<DD>
|
||||
Interlingue.
|
||||
<DT><SAMP>`ik'</SAMP>
|
||||
<DD>
|
||||
Inupiak.
|
||||
<DT><SAMP>`is'</SAMP>
|
||||
<DD>
|
||||
Icelandic.
|
||||
<DT><SAMP>`it'</SAMP>
|
||||
<DD>
|
||||
Italian.
|
||||
<DT><SAMP>`iu'</SAMP>
|
||||
<DD>
|
||||
Inuktitut.
|
||||
<DT><SAMP>`ja'</SAMP>
|
||||
<DD>
|
||||
Japanese.
|
||||
<DT><SAMP>`jw'</SAMP>
|
||||
<DD>
|
||||
Javanese.
|
||||
<DT><SAMP>`ka'</SAMP>
|
||||
<DD>
|
||||
Georgian.
|
||||
<DT><SAMP>`kk'</SAMP>
|
||||
<DD>
|
||||
Kazakh.
|
||||
<DT><SAMP>`kl'</SAMP>
|
||||
<DD>
|
||||
Greenlandic.
|
||||
<DT><SAMP>`km'</SAMP>
|
||||
<DD>
|
||||
Cambodian.
|
||||
<DT><SAMP>`kn'</SAMP>
|
||||
<DD>
|
||||
Kannada.
|
||||
<DT><SAMP>`ko'</SAMP>
|
||||
<DD>
|
||||
Korean.
|
||||
<DT><SAMP>`ks'</SAMP>
|
||||
<DD>
|
||||
Kashmiri.
|
||||
<DT><SAMP>`ku'</SAMP>
|
||||
<DD>
|
||||
Kurdish.
|
||||
<DT><SAMP>`ky'</SAMP>
|
||||
<DD>
|
||||
Kirghiz.
|
||||
<DT><SAMP>`la'</SAMP>
|
||||
<DD>
|
||||
Latin.
|
||||
<DT><SAMP>`ln'</SAMP>
|
||||
<DD>
|
||||
Lingala.
|
||||
<DT><SAMP>`lo'</SAMP>
|
||||
<DD>
|
||||
Laothian.
|
||||
<DT><SAMP>`lt'</SAMP>
|
||||
<DD>
|
||||
Lithuanian.
|
||||
<DT><SAMP>`lv'</SAMP>
|
||||
<DD>
|
||||
Latvian, Lettish.
|
||||
<DT><SAMP>`mg'</SAMP>
|
||||
<DD>
|
||||
Malagasy.
|
||||
<DT><SAMP>`mi'</SAMP>
|
||||
<DD>
|
||||
Maori.
|
||||
<DT><SAMP>`mk'</SAMP>
|
||||
<DD>
|
||||
Macedonian.
|
||||
<DT><SAMP>`ml'</SAMP>
|
||||
<DD>
|
||||
Malayalam.
|
||||
<DT><SAMP>`mn'</SAMP>
|
||||
<DD>
|
||||
Mongolian.
|
||||
<DT><SAMP>`mo'</SAMP>
|
||||
<DD>
|
||||
Moldavian.
|
||||
<DT><SAMP>`mr'</SAMP>
|
||||
<DD>
|
||||
Marathi.
|
||||
<DT><SAMP>`ms'</SAMP>
|
||||
<DD>
|
||||
Malay.
|
||||
<DT><SAMP>`mt'</SAMP>
|
||||
<DD>
|
||||
Maltese.
|
||||
<DT><SAMP>`my'</SAMP>
|
||||
<DD>
|
||||
Burmese.
|
||||
<DT><SAMP>`na'</SAMP>
|
||||
<DD>
|
||||
Nauru.
|
||||
<DT><SAMP>`ne'</SAMP>
|
||||
<DD>
|
||||
Nepali.
|
||||
<DT><SAMP>`nl'</SAMP>
|
||||
<DD>
|
||||
Dutch.
|
||||
<DT><SAMP>`no'</SAMP>
|
||||
<DD>
|
||||
Norwegian.
|
||||
<DT><SAMP>`oc'</SAMP>
|
||||
<DD>
|
||||
Occitan.
|
||||
<DT><SAMP>`om'</SAMP>
|
||||
<DD>
|
||||
(Afan) Oromo.
|
||||
<DT><SAMP>`or'</SAMP>
|
||||
<DD>
|
||||
Oriya.
|
||||
<DT><SAMP>`pa'</SAMP>
|
||||
<DD>
|
||||
Punjabi.
|
||||
<DT><SAMP>`pl'</SAMP>
|
||||
<DD>
|
||||
Polish.
|
||||
<DT><SAMP>`ps'</SAMP>
|
||||
<DD>
|
||||
Pashto, Pushto.
|
||||
<DT><SAMP>`pt'</SAMP>
|
||||
<DD>
|
||||
Portuguese.
|
||||
<DT><SAMP>`qu'</SAMP>
|
||||
<DD>
|
||||
Quechua.
|
||||
<DT><SAMP>`rm'</SAMP>
|
||||
<DD>
|
||||
Rhaeto-Romance.
|
||||
<DT><SAMP>`rn'</SAMP>
|
||||
<DD>
|
||||
Kirundi.
|
||||
<DT><SAMP>`ro'</SAMP>
|
||||
<DD>
|
||||
Romanian.
|
||||
<DT><SAMP>`ru'</SAMP>
|
||||
<DD>
|
||||
Russian.
|
||||
<DT><SAMP>`rw'</SAMP>
|
||||
<DD>
|
||||
Kinyarwanda.
|
||||
<DT><SAMP>`sa'</SAMP>
|
||||
<DD>
|
||||
Sanskrit.
|
||||
<DT><SAMP>`sd'</SAMP>
|
||||
<DD>
|
||||
Sindhi.
|
||||
<DT><SAMP>`sg'</SAMP>
|
||||
<DD>
|
||||
Sangro.
|
||||
<DT><SAMP>`sh'</SAMP>
|
||||
<DD>
|
||||
Serbo-Croatian.
|
||||
<DT><SAMP>`si'</SAMP>
|
||||
<DD>
|
||||
Sinhalese.
|
||||
<DT><SAMP>`sk'</SAMP>
|
||||
<DD>
|
||||
Slovak.
|
||||
<DT><SAMP>`sl'</SAMP>
|
||||
<DD>
|
||||
Slovenian.
|
||||
<DT><SAMP>`sm'</SAMP>
|
||||
<DD>
|
||||
Samoan.
|
||||
<DT><SAMP>`sn'</SAMP>
|
||||
<DD>
|
||||
Shona.
|
||||
<DT><SAMP>`so'</SAMP>
|
||||
<DD>
|
||||
Somali.
|
||||
<DT><SAMP>`sq'</SAMP>
|
||||
<DD>
|
||||
Albanian.
|
||||
<DT><SAMP>`sr'</SAMP>
|
||||
<DD>
|
||||
Serbian.
|
||||
<DT><SAMP>`ss'</SAMP>
|
||||
<DD>
|
||||
Siswati.
|
||||
<DT><SAMP>`st'</SAMP>
|
||||
<DD>
|
||||
Sesotho.
|
||||
<DT><SAMP>`su'</SAMP>
|
||||
<DD>
|
||||
Sundanese.
|
||||
<DT><SAMP>`sv'</SAMP>
|
||||
<DD>
|
||||
Swedish.
|
||||
<DT><SAMP>`sw'</SAMP>
|
||||
<DD>
|
||||
Swahili.
|
||||
<DT><SAMP>`ta'</SAMP>
|
||||
<DD>
|
||||
Tamil.
|
||||
<DT><SAMP>`te'</SAMP>
|
||||
<DD>
|
||||
Telugu.
|
||||
<DT><SAMP>`tg'</SAMP>
|
||||
<DD>
|
||||
Tajik.
|
||||
<DT><SAMP>`th'</SAMP>
|
||||
<DD>
|
||||
Thai.
|
||||
<DT><SAMP>`ti'</SAMP>
|
||||
<DD>
|
||||
Tigrinya.
|
||||
<DT><SAMP>`tk'</SAMP>
|
||||
<DD>
|
||||
Turkmen.
|
||||
<DT><SAMP>`tl'</SAMP>
|
||||
<DD>
|
||||
Tagalog.
|
||||
<DT><SAMP>`tn'</SAMP>
|
||||
<DD>
|
||||
Setswana.
|
||||
<DT><SAMP>`to'</SAMP>
|
||||
<DD>
|
||||
Tonga.
|
||||
<DT><SAMP>`tr'</SAMP>
|
||||
<DD>
|
||||
Turkish.
|
||||
<DT><SAMP>`ts'</SAMP>
|
||||
<DD>
|
||||
Tsonga.
|
||||
<DT><SAMP>`tt'</SAMP>
|
||||
<DD>
|
||||
Tatar.
|
||||
<DT><SAMP>`tw'</SAMP>
|
||||
<DD>
|
||||
Twi.
|
||||
<DT><SAMP>`ug'</SAMP>
|
||||
<DD>
|
||||
Uighur.
|
||||
<DT><SAMP>`uk'</SAMP>
|
||||
<DD>
|
||||
Ukrainian.
|
||||
<DT><SAMP>`ur'</SAMP>
|
||||
<DD>
|
||||
Urdu.
|
||||
<DT><SAMP>`uz'</SAMP>
|
||||
<DD>
|
||||
Uzbek.
|
||||
<DT><SAMP>`vi'</SAMP>
|
||||
<DD>
|
||||
Vietnamese.
|
||||
<DT><SAMP>`vo'</SAMP>
|
||||
<DD>
|
||||
Volapuk.
|
||||
<DT><SAMP>`wo'</SAMP>
|
||||
<DD>
|
||||
Wolof.
|
||||
<DT><SAMP>`xh'</SAMP>
|
||||
<DD>
|
||||
Xhosa.
|
||||
<DT><SAMP>`yi'</SAMP>
|
||||
<DD>
|
||||
Yiddish (formerly ji).
|
||||
<DT><SAMP>`yo'</SAMP>
|
||||
<DD>
|
||||
Yoruba.
|
||||
<DT><SAMP>`za'</SAMP>
|
||||
<DD>
|
||||
Zhuang.
|
||||
<DT><SAMP>`zh'</SAMP>
|
||||
<DD>
|
||||
Chinese.
|
||||
<DT><SAMP>`zu'</SAMP>
|
||||
<DD>
|
||||
Zulu.
|
||||
</DL>
|
||||
|
||||
<P><HR><P>
|
||||
<p>Go to the <A HREF="gettext_1.html">first</A>, <A HREF="gettext_11.html">previous</A>, next, last section, <A HREF="gettext_toc.html">table of contents</A>.
|
||||
</BODY>
|
||||
</HTML>
|
@ -1,667 +0,0 @@
|
||||
<HTML>
|
||||
<HEAD>
|
||||
<!-- This HTML file has been created by texi2html 1.54
|
||||
from gettext.texi on 25 January 1999 -->
|
||||
|
||||
<TITLE>GNU gettext utilities - PO Files and PO Mode Basics</TITLE>
|
||||
<link href="gettext_3.html" rel=Next>
|
||||
<link href="gettext_1.html" rel=Previous>
|
||||
<link href="gettext_toc.html" rel=ToC>
|
||||
|
||||
</HEAD>
|
||||
<BODY>
|
||||
<p>Go to the <A HREF="gettext_1.html">first</A>, <A HREF="gettext_1.html">previous</A>, <A HREF="gettext_3.html">next</A>, <A HREF="gettext_12.html">last</A> section, <A HREF="gettext_toc.html">table of contents</A>.
|
||||
<P><HR><P>
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
<H1><A NAME="SEC7" HREF="gettext_toc.html#TOC7">PO Files and PO Mode Basics</A></H1>
|
||||
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
The GNU <CODE>gettext</CODE> toolset helps programmers and translators
|
||||
at producing, updating and using translation files, mainly those
|
||||
PO files which are textual, editable files. This chapter stresses
|
||||
the format of PO files, and contains a PO mode starter. PO mode
|
||||
description is spread throughout this manual instead of being concentrated
|
||||
in one place. Here we present only the basics of PO mode.
|
||||
|
||||
</P>
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
<H2><A NAME="SEC8" HREF="gettext_toc.html#TOC8">Completing GNU <CODE>gettext</CODE> Installation</A></H2>
|
||||
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
Once you have received, unpacked, configured and compiled the GNU
|
||||
<CODE>gettext</CODE> distribution, the <SAMP>`make install'</SAMP> command puts in
|
||||
place the programs <CODE>xgettext</CODE>, <CODE>msgfmt</CODE>, <CODE>gettext</CODE>, and
|
||||
<CODE>msgmerge</CODE>, as well as their available message catalogs. To
|
||||
top off a comfortable installation, you might also want to make the
|
||||
PO mode available to your GNU Emacs users.
|
||||
|
||||
</P>
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
During the installation of the PO mode, you might want modify your
|
||||
file <TT>`.emacs'</TT>, once and for all, so it contains a few lines looking
|
||||
like:
|
||||
|
||||
</P>
|
||||
|
||||
<PRE>
|
||||
(setq auto-mode-alist
|
||||
(cons '("\\.po[tx]?\\'\\|\\.po\\." . po-mode) auto-mode-alist))
|
||||
(autoload 'po-mode "po-mode")
|
||||
</PRE>
|
||||
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
Later, whenever you edit some <TT>`.po'</TT>, <TT>`.pot'</TT> or <TT>`.pox'</TT>
|
||||
file, or any file having the string <SAMP>`.po.'</SAMP> within its name,
|
||||
Emacs loads <TT>`po-mode.elc'</TT> (or <TT>`po-mode.el'</TT>) as needed, and
|
||||
automatically activates PO mode commands for the associated buffer.
|
||||
The string <EM>PO</EM> appears in the mode line for any buffer for
|
||||
which PO mode is active. Many PO files may be active at once in a
|
||||
single Emacs session.
|
||||
|
||||
</P>
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
If you are using Emacs version 20 or better, and have already installed
|
||||
the appropriate international fonts on your system, you may also manage
|
||||
for the these fonts to be automatically loaded and used for displaying
|
||||
the translations on your Emacs screen, whenever necessary. For this to
|
||||
happen, you might want to add the lines:
|
||||
|
||||
</P>
|
||||
|
||||
<PRE>
|
||||
(autoload 'po-find-file-coding-system "po-mode")
|
||||
(modify-coding-system-alist 'file "\\.po[tx]?\\'\\|\\.po\\."
|
||||
'po-find-file-coding-system)
|
||||
</PRE>
|
||||
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
to your <TT>`.emacs'</TT> file.
|
||||
|
||||
</P>
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
<H2><A NAME="SEC9" HREF="gettext_toc.html#TOC9">The Format of PO Files</A></H2>
|
||||
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
A PO file is made up of many entries, each entry holding the relation
|
||||
between an original untranslated string and its corresponding
|
||||
translation. All entries in a given PO file usually pertain
|
||||
to a single project, and all translations are expressed in a single
|
||||
target language. One PO file <STRONG>entry</STRONG> has the following schematic
|
||||
structure:
|
||||
|
||||
</P>
|
||||
|
||||
<PRE>
|
||||
<VAR>white-space</VAR>
|
||||
# <VAR>translator-comments</VAR>
|
||||
#. <VAR>automatic-comments</VAR>
|
||||
#: <VAR>reference</VAR>...
|
||||
#, <VAR>flag</VAR>...
|
||||
msgid <VAR>untranslated-string</VAR>
|
||||
msgstr <VAR>translated-string</VAR>
|
||||
</PRE>
|
||||
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
The general structure of a PO file should be well understood by
|
||||
the translator. When using PO mode, very little has to be known
|
||||
about the format details, as PO mode takes care of them for her.
|
||||
|
||||
</P>
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
Entries begin with some optional white space. Usually, when generated
|
||||
through GNU <CODE>gettext</CODE> tools, there is exactly one blank line
|
||||
between entries. Then comments follow, on lines all starting with the
|
||||
character <KBD>#</KBD>. There are two kinds of comments: those which have
|
||||
some white space immediately following the <KBD>#</KBD>, which comments are
|
||||
created and maintained exclusively by the translator, and those which
|
||||
have some non-white character just after the <KBD>#</KBD>, which comments
|
||||
are created and maintained automatically by GNU <CODE>gettext</CODE> tools.
|
||||
All comments, of either kind, are optional.
|
||||
|
||||
</P>
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
After white space and comments, entries show two strings, giving
|
||||
first the untranslated string as it appears in the original program
|
||||
sources, and then, the translation of this string. The original
|
||||
string is introduced by the keyword <CODE>msgid</CODE>, and the translation,
|
||||
by <CODE>msgstr</CODE>. The two strings, untranslated and translated,
|
||||
are quoted in various ways in the PO file, using <KBD>"</KBD>
|
||||
delimiters and <KBD>\</KBD> escapes, but the translator does not really
|
||||
have to pay attention to the precise quoting format, as PO mode fully
|
||||
intend to take care of quoting for her.
|
||||
|
||||
</P>
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
The <CODE>msgid</CODE> strings, as well as automatic comments, are produced
|
||||
and managed by other GNU <CODE>gettext</CODE> tools, and PO mode does not
|
||||
provide means for the translator to alter these. The most she can
|
||||
do is merely deleting them, and only by deleting the whole entry.
|
||||
On the other hand, the <CODE>msgstr</CODE> string, as well as translator
|
||||
comments, are really meant for the translator, and PO mode gives her
|
||||
the full control she needs.
|
||||
|
||||
</P>
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
The comment lines beginning with <KBD>#,</KBD> are special because they are
|
||||
not completely ignored by the programs as comments generally are. The
|
||||
comma separated list of <VAR>flag</VAR>s is used by the <CODE>msgfmt</CODE>
|
||||
program to give the user some better diagnostic messages. Currently
|
||||
there are two forms of flags defined:
|
||||
|
||||
</P>
|
||||
<DL COMPACT>
|
||||
|
||||
<DT><KBD>fuzzy</KBD>
|
||||
<DD>
|
||||
This flag can be generated by the <CODE>msgmerge</CODE> program or it can be
|
||||
inserted by the translator herself. It shows that the <CODE>msgstr</CODE>
|
||||
string might not be a correct translation (anymore). Only the translator
|
||||
can judge if the translation requires further modification, or is
|
||||
acceptable as is. Once satisfied with the translation, she then removes
|
||||
this <KBD>fuzzy</KBD> attribute. The <CODE>msgmerge</CODE> programs inserts this
|
||||
when it combined the <CODE>msgid</CODE> and <CODE>msgstr</CODE> entries after fuzzy
|
||||
search only. See section <A HREF="gettext_5.html#SEC26">Fuzzy Entries</A>.
|
||||
|
||||
<DT><KBD>c-format</KBD>
|
||||
<DD>
|
||||
<DT><KBD>no-c-format</KBD>
|
||||
<DD>
|
||||
These flags should not be added by a human. Instead only the
|
||||
<CODE>xgettext</CODE> program adds them. In an automated PO file processing
|
||||
system as proposed here the user changes would be thrown away again as
|
||||
soon as the <CODE>xgettext</CODE> program generates a new template file.
|
||||
|
||||
In case the <KBD>c-format</KBD> flag is given for a string the <CODE>msgfmt</CODE>
|
||||
does some more tests to check to validity of the translation.
|
||||
See section <A HREF="gettext_6.html#SEC33">Invoking the <CODE>msgfmt</CODE> Program</A>.
|
||||
|
||||
</DL>
|
||||
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
It happens that some lines, usually whitespace or comments, follow the
|
||||
very last entry of a PO file. Such lines are not part of any entry,
|
||||
and PO mode is unable to take action on those lines. By using the
|
||||
PO mode function <KBD>M-x po-normalize</KBD>, the translator may get
|
||||
rid of those spurious lines. See section <A HREF="gettext_2.html#SEC12">Normalizing Strings in Entries</A>.
|
||||
|
||||
</P>
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
The remainder of this section may be safely skipped by those using
|
||||
PO mode, yet it may be interesting for everybody to have a better
|
||||
idea of the precise format of a PO file. On the other hand, those
|
||||
not having GNU Emacs handy should carefully continue reading on.
|
||||
|
||||
</P>
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
Each of <VAR>untranslated-string</VAR> and <VAR>translated-string</VAR> respects
|
||||
the C syntax for a character string, including the surrounding quotes
|
||||
and embedded backslashed escape sequences. When the time comes
|
||||
to write multi-line strings, one should not use escaped newlines.
|
||||
Instead, a closing quote should follow the last character on the
|
||||
line to be continued, and an opening quote should resume the string
|
||||
at the beginning of the following PO file line. For example:
|
||||
|
||||
</P>
|
||||
|
||||
<PRE>
|
||||
msgid ""
|
||||
"Here is an example of how one might continue a very long string\n"
|
||||
"for the common case the string represents multi-line output.\n"
|
||||
</PRE>
|
||||
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
In this example, the empty string is used on the first line, to
|
||||
allow better alignment of the <KBD>H</KBD> from the word <SAMP>`Here'</SAMP>
|
||||
over the <KBD>f</KBD> from the word <SAMP>`for'</SAMP>. In this example, the
|
||||
<CODE>msgid</CODE> keyword is followed by three strings, which are meant
|
||||
to be concatenated. Concatenating the empty string does not change
|
||||
the resulting overall string, but it is a way for us to comply with
|
||||
the necessity of <CODE>msgid</CODE> to be followed by a string on the same
|
||||
line, while keeping the multi-line presentation left-justified, as
|
||||
we find this to be a cleaner disposition. The empty string could have
|
||||
been omitted, but only if the string starting with <SAMP>`Here'</SAMP> was
|
||||
promoted on the first line, right after <CODE>msgid</CODE>.<A NAME="DOCF1" HREF="gettext_foot.html#FOOT1">(1)</A> It was not really necessary
|
||||
either to switch between the two last quoted strings immediately after
|
||||
the newline <SAMP>`\n'</SAMP>, the switch could have occurred after <EM>any</EM>
|
||||
other character, we just did it this way because it is neater.
|
||||
|
||||
</P>
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
One should carefully distinguish between end of lines marked as
|
||||
<SAMP>`\n'</SAMP> <EM>inside</EM> quotes, which are part of the represented
|
||||
string, and end of lines in the PO file itself, outside string quotes,
|
||||
which have no incidence on the represented string.
|
||||
|
||||
</P>
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
Outside strings, white lines and comments may be used freely.
|
||||
Comments start at the beginning of a line with <SAMP>`#'</SAMP> and extend
|
||||
until the end of the PO file line. Comments written by translators
|
||||
should have the initial <SAMP>`#'</SAMP> immediately followed by some white
|
||||
space. If the <SAMP>`#'</SAMP> is not immediately followed by white space,
|
||||
this comment is most likely generated and managed by specialized GNU
|
||||
tools, and might disappear or be replaced unexpectedly when the PO
|
||||
file is given to <CODE>msgmerge</CODE>.
|
||||
|
||||
</P>
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
<H2><A NAME="SEC10" HREF="gettext_toc.html#TOC10">Main PO mode Commands</A></H2>
|
||||
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
After setting up Emacs with something similar to the lines in
|
||||
section <A HREF="gettext_2.html#SEC8">Completing GNU <CODE>gettext</CODE> Installation</A>, PO mode is activated for a window when Emacs finds a
|
||||
PO file in that window. This puts the window read-only and establishes a
|
||||
po-mode-map, which is a genuine Emacs mode, in a way that is not derived
|
||||
from text mode in any way. Functions found on <CODE>po-mode-hook</CODE>,
|
||||
if any, will be executed.
|
||||
|
||||
</P>
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
When PO mode is active in a window, the letters <SAMP>`PO'</SAMP> appear
|
||||
in the mode line for that window. The mode line also displays how
|
||||
many entries of each kind are held in the PO file. For example,
|
||||
the string <SAMP>`132t+3f+10u+2o'</SAMP> would tell the translator that the
|
||||
PO mode contains 132 translated entries (see section <A HREF="gettext_5.html#SEC25">Translated Entries</A>,
|
||||
3 fuzzy entries (see section <A HREF="gettext_5.html#SEC26">Fuzzy Entries</A>), 10 untranslated entries
|
||||
(see section <A HREF="gettext_5.html#SEC27">Untranslated Entries</A>) and 2 obsolete entries (see section <A HREF="gettext_5.html#SEC28">Obsolete Entries</A>). Zero-coefficients items are not shown. So, in this example, if
|
||||
the fuzzy entries were unfuzzied, the untranslated entries were translated
|
||||
and the obsolete entries were deleted, the mode line would merely display
|
||||
<SAMP>`145t'</SAMP> for the counters.
|
||||
|
||||
</P>
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
The main PO commands are those which do not fit into the other categories of
|
||||
subsequent sections. These allow for quitting PO mode or for managing windows
|
||||
in special ways.
|
||||
|
||||
</P>
|
||||
<DL COMPACT>
|
||||
|
||||
<DT><KBD>U</KBD>
|
||||
<DD>
|
||||
Undo last modification to the PO file.
|
||||
|
||||
<DT><KBD>Q</KBD>
|
||||
<DD>
|
||||
Quit processing and save the PO file.
|
||||
|
||||
<DT><KBD>q</KBD>
|
||||
<DD>
|
||||
Quit processing, possibly after confirmation.
|
||||
|
||||
<DT><KBD>O</KBD>
|
||||
<DD>
|
||||
Temporary leave the PO file window.
|
||||
|
||||
<DT><KBD>?</KBD>
|
||||
<DD>
|
||||
<DT><KBD>h</KBD>
|
||||
<DD>
|
||||
Show help about PO mode.
|
||||
|
||||
<DT><KBD>=</KBD>
|
||||
<DD>
|
||||
Give some PO file statistics.
|
||||
|
||||
<DT><KBD>V</KBD>
|
||||
<DD>
|
||||
Batch validate the format of the whole PO file.
|
||||
|
||||
</DL>
|
||||
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
The command <KBD>U</KBD> (<CODE>po-undo</CODE>) interfaces to the GNU Emacs
|
||||
<EM>undo</EM> facility. See section `Undoing Changes' in <CITE>The Emacs Editor</CITE>. Each time <KBD>U</KBD> is typed, modifications which the translator
|
||||
did to the PO file are undone a little more. For the purpose of
|
||||
undoing, each PO mode command is atomic. This is especially true for
|
||||
the <KBD><KBD>RET</KBD></KBD> command: the whole edition made by using a single
|
||||
use of this command is undone at once, even if the edition itself
|
||||
implied several actions. However, while in the editing window, one
|
||||
can undo the edition work quite parsimoniously.
|
||||
|
||||
</P>
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
The commands <KBD>Q</KBD> (<CODE>po-quit</CODE>) and <KBD>q</KBD>
|
||||
(<CODE>po-confirm-and-quit</CODE>) are used when the translator is done with the
|
||||
PO file. The former is a bit less verbose than the latter. If the file
|
||||
has been modified, it is saved to disk first. In both cases, and prior to
|
||||
all this, the commands check if some untranslated message remains in the
|
||||
PO file and, if yes, the translator is asked if she really wants to leave
|
||||
off working with this PO file. This is the preferred way of getting rid
|
||||
of an Emacs PO file buffer. Merely killing it through the usual command
|
||||
<KBD>C-x k</KBD> (<CODE>kill-buffer</CODE>) is not the tidiest way to proceed.
|
||||
|
||||
</P>
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
The command <KBD>O</KBD> (<CODE>po-other-window</CODE>) is another, softer way,
|
||||
to leave PO mode, temporarily. It just moves the cursor to some other
|
||||
Emacs window, and pops one if necessary. For example, if the translator
|
||||
just got PO mode to show some source context in some other, she might
|
||||
discover some apparent bug in the program source that needs correction.
|
||||
This command allows the translator to change sex, become a programmer,
|
||||
and have the cursor right into the window containing the program she
|
||||
(or rather <EM>he</EM>) wants to modify. By later getting the cursor back
|
||||
in the PO file window, or by asking Emacs to edit this file once again,
|
||||
PO mode is then recovered.
|
||||
|
||||
</P>
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
The command <KBD>h</KBD> (<CODE>po-help</CODE>) displays a summary of all available PO
|
||||
mode commands. The translator should then type any character to resume
|
||||
normal PO mode operations. The command <KBD>?</KBD> has the same effect
|
||||
as <KBD>h</KBD>.
|
||||
|
||||
</P>
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
The command <KBD>=</KBD> (<CODE>po-statistics</CODE>) computes the total number of
|
||||
entries in the PO file, the ordinal of the current entry (counted from
|
||||
1), the number of untranslated entries, the number of obsolete entries,
|
||||
and displays all these numbers.
|
||||
|
||||
</P>
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
The command <KBD>V</KBD> (<CODE>po-validate</CODE>) launches <CODE>msgfmt</CODE> in verbose
|
||||
mode over the current PO file. This command first offers to save the
|
||||
current PO file on disk. The <CODE>msgfmt</CODE> tool, from GNU <CODE>gettext</CODE>,
|
||||
has the purpose of creating a MO file out of a PO file, and PO mode uses
|
||||
the features of this program for checking the overall format of a PO file,
|
||||
as well as all individual entries.
|
||||
|
||||
</P>
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
The program <CODE>msgfmt</CODE> runs asynchronously with Emacs, so the
|
||||
translator regains control immediately while her PO file is being studied.
|
||||
Error output is collected in the GNU Emacs <SAMP>`*compilation*'</SAMP> buffer,
|
||||
displayed in another window. The regular GNU Emacs command <KBD>C-x`</KBD>
|
||||
(<CODE>next-error</CODE>), as well as other usual compile commands, allow the
|
||||
translator to reposition quickly to the offending parts of the PO file.
|
||||
Once the cursor is on the line in error, the translator may decide on
|
||||
any PO mode action which would help correcting the error.
|
||||
|
||||
</P>
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
<H2><A NAME="SEC11" HREF="gettext_toc.html#TOC11">Entry Positioning</A></H2>
|
||||
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
The cursor in a PO file window is almost always part of
|
||||
an entry. The only exceptions are the special case when the cursor
|
||||
is after the last entry in the file, or when the PO file is
|
||||
empty. The entry where the cursor is found to be is said to be the
|
||||
current entry. Many PO mode commands operate on the current entry,
|
||||
so moving the cursor does more than allowing the translator to browse
|
||||
the PO file, this also selects on which entry commands operate.
|
||||
|
||||
</P>
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
Some PO mode commands alter the position of the cursor in a specialized
|
||||
way. A few of those special purpose positioning are described here,
|
||||
the others are described in following sections.
|
||||
|
||||
</P>
|
||||
<DL COMPACT>
|
||||
|
||||
<DT><KBD>.</KBD>
|
||||
<DD>
|
||||
Redisplay the current entry.
|
||||
|
||||
<DT><KBD>n</KBD>
|
||||
<DD>
|
||||
<DT><KBD>n</KBD>
|
||||
<DD>
|
||||
Select the entry after the current one.
|
||||
|
||||
<DT><KBD>p</KBD>
|
||||
<DD>
|
||||
<DT><KBD>p</KBD>
|
||||
<DD>
|
||||
Select the entry before the current one.
|
||||
|
||||
<DT><KBD><</KBD>
|
||||
<DD>
|
||||
Select the first entry in the PO file.
|
||||
|
||||
<DT><KBD>></KBD>
|
||||
<DD>
|
||||
Select the last entry in the PO file.
|
||||
|
||||
<DT><KBD>m</KBD>
|
||||
<DD>
|
||||
Record the location of the current entry for later use.
|
||||
|
||||
<DT><KBD>l</KBD>
|
||||
<DD>
|
||||
Return to a previously saved entry location.
|
||||
|
||||
<DT><KBD>x</KBD>
|
||||
<DD>
|
||||
Exchange the current entry location with the previously saved one.
|
||||
|
||||
</DL>
|
||||
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
Any GNU Emacs command able to reposition the cursor may be used
|
||||
to select the current entry in PO mode, including commands which
|
||||
move by characters, lines, paragraphs, screens or pages, and search
|
||||
commands. However, there is a kind of standard way to display the
|
||||
current entry in PO mode, which usual GNU Emacs commands moving
|
||||
the cursor do not especially try to enforce. The command <KBD>.</KBD>
|
||||
(<CODE>po-current-entry</CODE>) has the sole purpose of redisplaying the
|
||||
current entry properly, after the current entry has been changed by
|
||||
means external to PO mode, or the Emacs screen otherwise altered.
|
||||
|
||||
</P>
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
It is yet to be decided if PO mode helps the translator, or otherwise
|
||||
irritates her, by forcing a rigid window disposition while she
|
||||
is doing her work. We originally had quite precise ideas about
|
||||
how windows should behave, but on the other hand, anyone used to
|
||||
GNU Emacs is often happy to keep full control. Maybe a fixed window
|
||||
disposition might be offered as a PO mode option that the translator
|
||||
might activate or deactivate at will, so it could be offered on an
|
||||
experimental basis. If nobody feels a real need for using it, or
|
||||
a compulsion for writing it, we should drop this whole idea.
|
||||
The incentive for doing it should come from translators rather than
|
||||
programmers, as opinions from an experienced translator are surely
|
||||
more worth to me than opinions from programmers <EM>thinking</EM> about
|
||||
how <EM>others</EM> should do translation.
|
||||
|
||||
</P>
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
The commands <KBD>n</KBD> (<CODE>po-next-entry</CODE>) and <KBD>p</KBD>
|
||||
(<CODE>po-previous-entry</CODE>) move the cursor the entry following,
|
||||
or preceding, the current one. If <KBD>n</KBD> is given while the
|
||||
cursor is on the last entry of the PO file, or if <KBD>p</KBD>
|
||||
is given while the cursor is on the first entry, no move is done.
|
||||
|
||||
</P>
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
The commands <KBD><</KBD> (<CODE>po-first-entry</CODE>) and <KBD>></KBD>
|
||||
(<CODE>po-last-entry</CODE>) move the cursor to the first entry, or last
|
||||
entry, of the PO file. When the cursor is located past the last
|
||||
entry in a PO file, most PO mode commands will return an error saying
|
||||
<SAMP>`After last entry'</SAMP>. Moreover, the commands <KBD><</KBD> and <KBD>></KBD>
|
||||
have the special property of being able to work even when the cursor
|
||||
is not into some PO file entry, and one may use them for nicely
|
||||
correcting this situation. But even these commands will fail on a
|
||||
truly empty PO file. There are development plans for the PO mode for it
|
||||
to interactively fill an empty PO file from sources. See section <A HREF="gettext_3.html#SEC16">Marking Translatable Strings</A>.
|
||||
|
||||
</P>
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
The translator may decide, before working at the translation of
|
||||
a particular entry, that she needs to browse the remainder of the
|
||||
PO file, maybe for finding the terminology or phraseology used
|
||||
in related entries. She can of course use the standard Emacs idioms
|
||||
for saving the current cursor location in some register, and use that
|
||||
register for getting back, or else, use the location ring.
|
||||
|
||||
</P>
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
PO mode offers another approach, by which cursor locations may be saved
|
||||
onto a special stack. The command <KBD>m</KBD> (<CODE>po-push-location</CODE>)
|
||||
merely adds the location of current entry to the stack, pushing
|
||||
the already saved locations under the new one. The command
|
||||
<KBD>r</KBD> (<CODE>po-pop-location</CODE>) consumes the top stack element and
|
||||
reposition the cursor to the entry associated with that top element.
|
||||
This position is then lost, for the next <KBD>r</KBD> will move the cursor
|
||||
to the previously saved location, and so on until no locations remain
|
||||
on the stack.
|
||||
|
||||
</P>
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
If the translator wants the position to be kept on the location stack,
|
||||
maybe for taking a look at the entry associated with the top
|
||||
element, then go elsewhere with the intent of getting back later, she
|
||||
ought to use <KBD>m</KBD> immediately after <KBD>r</KBD>.
|
||||
|
||||
</P>
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
The command <KBD>x</KBD> (<CODE>po-exchange-location</CODE>) simultaneously
|
||||
reposition the cursor to the entry associated with the top element of
|
||||
the stack of saved locations, and replace that top element with the
|
||||
location of the current entry before the move. Consequently, repeating
|
||||
the <KBD>x</KBD> command toggles alternatively between two entries.
|
||||
For achieving this, the translator will position the cursor on the
|
||||
first entry, use <KBD>m</KBD>, then position to the second entry, and
|
||||
merely use <KBD>x</KBD> for making the switch.
|
||||
|
||||
</P>
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
<H2><A NAME="SEC12" HREF="gettext_toc.html#TOC12">Normalizing Strings in Entries</A></H2>
|
||||
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
There are many different ways for encoding a particular string into a
|
||||
PO file entry, because there are so many different ways to split and
|
||||
quote multi-line strings, and even, to represent special characters
|
||||
by backslashed escaped sequences. Some features of PO mode rely on
|
||||
the ability for PO mode to scan an already existing PO file for a
|
||||
particular string encoded into the <CODE>msgid</CODE> field of some entry.
|
||||
Even if PO mode has internally all the built-in machinery for
|
||||
implementing this recognition easily, doing it fast is technically
|
||||
difficult. To facilitate a solution to this efficiency problem,
|
||||
we decided on a canonical representation for strings.
|
||||
|
||||
</P>
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
A conventional representation of strings in a PO file is currently
|
||||
under discussion, and PO mode experiments with a canonical representation.
|
||||
Having both <CODE>xgettext</CODE> and PO mode converging towards a uniform
|
||||
way of representing equivalent strings would be useful, as the internal
|
||||
normalization needed by PO mode could be automatically satisfied
|
||||
when using <CODE>xgettext</CODE> from GNU <CODE>gettext</CODE>. An explicit
|
||||
PO mode normalization should then be only necessary for PO files
|
||||
imported from elsewhere, or for when the convention itself evolves.
|
||||
|
||||
</P>
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
So, for achieving normalization of at least the strings of a given
|
||||
PO file needing a canonical representation, the following PO mode
|
||||
command is available:
|
||||
|
||||
</P>
|
||||
<DL COMPACT>
|
||||
|
||||
<DT><KBD>M-x po-normalize</KBD>
|
||||
<DD>
|
||||
Tidy the whole PO file by making entries more uniform.
|
||||
|
||||
</DL>
|
||||
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
The special command <KBD>M-x po-normalize</KBD>, which has no associate
|
||||
keys, revises all entries, ensuring that strings of both original
|
||||
and translated entries use uniform internal quoting in the PO file.
|
||||
It also removes any crumb after the last entry. This command may be
|
||||
useful for PO files freshly imported from elsewhere, or if we ever
|
||||
improve on the canonical quoting format we use. This canonical format
|
||||
is not only meant for getting cleaner PO files, but also for greatly
|
||||
speeding up <CODE>msgid</CODE> string lookup for some other PO mode commands.
|
||||
|
||||
</P>
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
<KBD>M-x po-normalize</KBD> presently makes three passes over the entries.
|
||||
The first implements heuristics for converting PO files for GNU
|
||||
<CODE>gettext</CODE> 0.6 and earlier, in which <CODE>msgid</CODE> and <CODE>msgstr</CODE>
|
||||
fields were using K&R style C string syntax for multi-line strings.
|
||||
These heuristics may fail for comments not related to obsolete
|
||||
entries and ending with a backslash; they also depend on subsequent
|
||||
passes for finalizing the proper commenting of continued lines for
|
||||
obsolete entries. This first pass might disappear once all oldish PO
|
||||
files would have been adjusted. The second and third pass normalize
|
||||
all <CODE>msgid</CODE> and <CODE>msgstr</CODE> strings respectively. They also
|
||||
clean out those trailing backslashes used by XView's <CODE>msgfmt</CODE>
|
||||
for continued lines.
|
||||
|
||||
</P>
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
Having such an explicit normalizing command allows for importing PO
|
||||
files from other sources, but also eases the evolution of the current
|
||||
convention, evolution driven mostly by aesthetic concerns, as of now.
|
||||
It is easy to make suggested adjustments at a later time, as the
|
||||
normalizing command and eventually, other GNU <CODE>gettext</CODE> tools
|
||||
should greatly automate conformance. A description of the canonical
|
||||
string format is given below, for the particular benefit of those not
|
||||
having GNU Emacs handy, and who would nevertheless want to handcraft
|
||||
their PO files in nice ways.
|
||||
|
||||
</P>
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
Right now, in PO mode, strings are single line or multi-line. A string
|
||||
goes multi-line if and only if it has <EM>embedded</EM> newlines, that
|
||||
is, if it matches <SAMP>`[^\n]\n+[^\n]'</SAMP>. So, we would have:
|
||||
|
||||
</P>
|
||||
|
||||
<PRE>
|
||||
msgstr "\n\nHello, world!\n\n\n"
|
||||
</PRE>
|
||||
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
but, replacing the space by a newline, this becomes:
|
||||
|
||||
</P>
|
||||
|
||||
<PRE>
|
||||
msgstr ""
|
||||
"\n"
|
||||
"\n"
|
||||
"Hello,\n"
|
||||
"world!\n"
|
||||
"\n"
|
||||
"\n"
|
||||
</PRE>
|
||||
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
We are deliberately using a caricatural example, here, to make the
|
||||
point clearer. Usually, multi-lines are not that bad looking.
|
||||
It is probable that we will implement the following suggestion.
|
||||
We might lump together all initial newlines into the empty string,
|
||||
and also all newlines introducing empty lines (that is, for <VAR>n</VAR>
|
||||
> 1, the <VAR>n</VAR>-1'th last newlines would go together on a separate
|
||||
string), so making the previous example appear:
|
||||
|
||||
</P>
|
||||
|
||||
<PRE>
|
||||
msgstr "\n\n"
|
||||
"Hello,\n"
|
||||
"world!\n"
|
||||
"\n\n"
|
||||
</PRE>
|
||||
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
There are a few yet undecided little points about string normalization,
|
||||
to be documented in this manual, once these questions settle.
|
||||
|
||||
</P>
|
||||
<P><HR><P>
|
||||
<p>Go to the <A HREF="gettext_1.html">first</A>, <A HREF="gettext_1.html">previous</A>, <A HREF="gettext_3.html">next</A>, <A HREF="gettext_12.html">last</A> section, <A HREF="gettext_toc.html">table of contents</A>.
|
||||
</BODY>
|
||||
</HTML>
|
@ -1,606 +0,0 @@
|
||||
<HTML>
|
||||
<HEAD>
|
||||
<!-- This HTML file has been created by texi2html 1.54
|
||||
from gettext.texi on 25 January 1999 -->
|
||||
|
||||
<TITLE>GNU gettext utilities - Preparing Program Sources</TITLE>
|
||||
<link href="gettext_4.html" rel=Next>
|
||||
<link href="gettext_2.html" rel=Previous>
|
||||
<link href="gettext_toc.html" rel=ToC>
|
||||
|
||||
</HEAD>
|
||||
<BODY>
|
||||
<p>Go to the <A HREF="gettext_1.html">first</A>, <A HREF="gettext_2.html">previous</A>, <A HREF="gettext_4.html">next</A>, <A HREF="gettext_12.html">last</A> section, <A HREF="gettext_toc.html">table of contents</A>.
|
||||
<P><HR><P>
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
<H1><A NAME="SEC13" HREF="gettext_toc.html#TOC13">Preparing Program Sources</A></H1>
|
||||
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
For the programmer, changes to the C source code fall into three
|
||||
categories. First, you have to make the localization functions
|
||||
known to all modules needing message translation. Second, you should
|
||||
properly trigger the operation of GNU <CODE>gettext</CODE> when the program
|
||||
initializes, usually from the <CODE>main</CODE> function. Last, you should
|
||||
identify and especially mark all constant strings in your program
|
||||
needing translation.
|
||||
|
||||
</P>
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
Presuming that your set of programs, or package, has been adjusted
|
||||
so all needed GNU <CODE>gettext</CODE> files are available, and your
|
||||
<TT>`Makefile'</TT> files are adjusted (see section <A HREF="gettext_10.html#SEC67">The Maintainer's View</A>), each C module
|
||||
having translated C strings should contain the line:
|
||||
|
||||
</P>
|
||||
|
||||
<PRE>
|
||||
#include <libintl.h>
|
||||
</PRE>
|
||||
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
The remaining changes to your C sources are discussed in the further
|
||||
sections of this chapter.
|
||||
|
||||
</P>
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
<H2><A NAME="SEC14" HREF="gettext_toc.html#TOC14">Triggering <CODE>gettext</CODE> Operations</A></H2>
|
||||
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
The initialization of locale data should be done with more or less
|
||||
the same code in every program, as demonstrated below:
|
||||
|
||||
</P>
|
||||
|
||||
<PRE>
|
||||
int
|
||||
main (argc, argv)
|
||||
int argc;
|
||||
char argv;
|
||||
{
|
||||
...
|
||||
setlocale (LC_ALL, "");
|
||||
bindtextdomain (PACKAGE, LOCALEDIR);
|
||||
textdomain (PACKAGE);
|
||||
...
|
||||
}
|
||||
</PRE>
|
||||
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
<VAR>PACKAGE</VAR> and <VAR>LOCALEDIR</VAR> should be provided either by
|
||||
<TT>`config.h'</TT> or by the Makefile. For now consult the <CODE>gettext</CODE>
|
||||
sources for more information.
|
||||
|
||||
</P>
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
The use of <CODE>LC_ALL</CODE> might not be appropriate for you.
|
||||
<CODE>LC_ALL</CODE> includes all locale categories and especially
|
||||
<CODE>LC_CTYPE</CODE>. This later category is responsible for determining
|
||||
character classes with the <CODE>isalnum</CODE> etc. functions from
|
||||
<TT>`ctype.h'</TT> which could especially for programs, which process some
|
||||
kind of input language, be wrong. For example this would mean that a
|
||||
source code using the @,{c} (c-cedilla character) is runnable in
|
||||
France but not in the U.S.
|
||||
|
||||
</P>
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
Some systems also have problems with parsing number using the
|
||||
<CODE>scanf</CODE> functions if an other but the <CODE>LC_ALL</CODE> locale is used.
|
||||
The standards say that additional formats but the one known in the
|
||||
<CODE>"C"</CODE> locale might be recognized. But some systems seem to reject
|
||||
numbers in the <CODE>"C"</CODE> locale format. In some situation, it might
|
||||
also be a problem with the notation itself which makes it impossible to
|
||||
recognize whether the number is in the <CODE>"C"</CODE> locale or the local
|
||||
format. This can happen if thousands separator characters are used.
|
||||
Some locales define this character according to the national
|
||||
conventions to <CODE>'.'</CODE> which is the same character used in the
|
||||
<CODE>"C"</CODE> locale to denote the decimal point.
|
||||
|
||||
</P>
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
So it is sometimes necessary to replace the <CODE>LC_ALL</CODE> line in the
|
||||
code above by a sequence of <CODE>setlocale</CODE> lines
|
||||
|
||||
</P>
|
||||
|
||||
<PRE>
|
||||
{
|
||||
...
|
||||
setlocale (LC_TIME, "");
|
||||
setlocale (LC_MESSAGES, "");
|
||||
...
|
||||
}
|
||||
</PRE>
|
||||
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
or to switch for and back to the character class in question. On all
|
||||
POSIX conformant systems the locale categories <CODE>LC_CTYPE</CODE>,
|
||||
<CODE>LC_COLLATE</CODE>, <CODE>LC_MONETARY</CODE>, <CODE>LC_NUMERIC</CODE>, and
|
||||
<CODE>LC_TIME</CODE> are available. On some modern systems there is also a
|
||||
locale <CODE>LC_MESSAGES</CODE> which is called on some old, XPG2 compliant
|
||||
systems <CODE>LC_RESPONSES</CODE>.
|
||||
|
||||
</P>
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
<H2><A NAME="SEC15" HREF="gettext_toc.html#TOC15">How Marks Appears in Sources</A></H2>
|
||||
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
All strings requiring translation should be marked in the C sources. Marking
|
||||
is done in such a way that each translatable string appears to be
|
||||
the sole argument of some function or preprocessor macro. There are
|
||||
only a few such possible functions or macros meant for translation,
|
||||
and their names are said to be marking keywords. The marking is
|
||||
attached to strings themselves, rather than to what we do with them.
|
||||
This approach has more uses. A blatant example is an error message
|
||||
produced by formatting. The format string needs translation, as
|
||||
well as some strings inserted through some <SAMP>`%s'</SAMP> specification
|
||||
in the format, while the result from <CODE>sprintf</CODE> may have so many
|
||||
different instances that it is impractical to list them all in some
|
||||
<SAMP>`error_string_out()'</SAMP> routine, say.
|
||||
|
||||
</P>
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
This marking operation has two goals. The first goal of marking
|
||||
is for triggering the retrieval of the translation, at run time.
|
||||
The keyword are possibly resolved into a routine able to dynamically
|
||||
return the proper translation, as far as possible or wanted, for the
|
||||
argument string. Most localizable strings are found in executable
|
||||
positions, that is, attached to variables or given as parameters to
|
||||
functions. But this is not universal usage, and some translatable
|
||||
strings appear in structured initializations. See section <A HREF="gettext_3.html#SEC18">Special Cases of Translatable Strings</A>.
|
||||
|
||||
</P>
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
The second goal of the marking operation is to help <CODE>xgettext</CODE>
|
||||
at properly extracting all translatable strings when it scans a set
|
||||
of program sources and produces PO file templates.
|
||||
|
||||
</P>
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
The canonical keyword for marking translatable strings is
|
||||
<SAMP>`gettext'</SAMP>, it gave its name to the whole GNU <CODE>gettext</CODE>
|
||||
package. For packages making only light use of the <SAMP>`gettext'</SAMP>
|
||||
keyword, macro or function, it is easily used <EM>as is</EM>. However,
|
||||
for packages using the <CODE>gettext</CODE> interface more heavily, it
|
||||
is usually more convenient to give the main keyword a shorter, less
|
||||
obtrusive name. Indeed, the keyword might appear on a lot of strings
|
||||
all over the package, and programmers usually do not want nor need
|
||||
their program sources to remind them forcefully, all the time, that they
|
||||
are internationalized. Further, a long keyword has the disadvantage
|
||||
of using more horizontal space, forcing more indentation work on
|
||||
sources for those trying to keep them within 79 or 80 columns.
|
||||
|
||||
</P>
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
Many packages use <SAMP>`_'</SAMP> (a simple underline) as a keyword,
|
||||
and write <SAMP>`_("Translatable string")'</SAMP> instead of <SAMP>`gettext
|
||||
("Translatable string")'</SAMP>. Further, the coding rule, from GNU standards,
|
||||
wanting that there is a space between the keyword and the opening
|
||||
parenthesis is relaxed, in practice, for this particular usage.
|
||||
So, the textual overhead per translatable string is reduced to
|
||||
only three characters: the underline and the two parentheses.
|
||||
However, even if GNU <CODE>gettext</CODE> uses this convention internally,
|
||||
it does not offer it officially. The real, genuine keyword is truly
|
||||
<SAMP>`gettext'</SAMP> indeed. It is fairly easy for those wanting to use
|
||||
<SAMP>`_'</SAMP> instead of <SAMP>`gettext'</SAMP> to declare:
|
||||
|
||||
</P>
|
||||
|
||||
<PRE>
|
||||
#include <libintl.h>
|
||||
#define _(String) gettext (String)
|
||||
</PRE>
|
||||
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
instead of merely using <SAMP>`#include <libintl.h>'</SAMP>.
|
||||
|
||||
</P>
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
Later on, the maintenance is relatively easy. If, as a programmer,
|
||||
you add or modify a string, you will have to ask yourself if the
|
||||
new or altered string requires translation, and include it within
|
||||
<SAMP>`_()'</SAMP> if you think it should be translated. <SAMP>`"%s: %d"'</SAMP> is
|
||||
an example of string <EM>not</EM> requiring translation!
|
||||
|
||||
</P>
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
<H2><A NAME="SEC16" HREF="gettext_toc.html#TOC16">Marking Translatable Strings</A></H2>
|
||||
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
In PO mode, one set of features is meant more for the programmer than
|
||||
for the translator, and allows him to interactively mark which strings,
|
||||
in a set of program sources, are translatable, and which are not.
|
||||
Even if it is a fairly easy job for a programmer to find and mark
|
||||
such strings by other means, using any editor of his choice, PO mode
|
||||
makes this work more comfortable. Further, this gives translators
|
||||
who feel a little like programmers, or programmers who feel a little
|
||||
like translators, a tool letting them work at marking translatable
|
||||
strings in the program sources, while simultaneously producing a set of
|
||||
translation in some language, for the package being internationalized.
|
||||
|
||||
</P>
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
The set of program sources, targetted by the PO mode commands describe
|
||||
here, should have an Emacs tags table constructed for your project,
|
||||
prior to using these PO file commands. This is easy to do. In any
|
||||
shell window, change the directory to the root of your project, then
|
||||
execute a command resembling:
|
||||
|
||||
</P>
|
||||
|
||||
<PRE>
|
||||
etags src/*.[hc] lib/*.[hc]
|
||||
</PRE>
|
||||
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
presuming here you want to process all <TT>`.h'</TT> and <TT>`.c'</TT> files
|
||||
from the <TT>`src/'</TT> and <TT>`lib/'</TT> directories. This command will
|
||||
explore all said files and create a <TT>`TAGS'</TT> file in your root
|
||||
directory, somewhat summarizing the contents using a special file
|
||||
format Emacs can understand.
|
||||
|
||||
</P>
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
For packages following the GNU coding standards, there is
|
||||
a make goal <CODE>tags</CODE> or <CODE>TAGS</CODE> which construct the tag files in
|
||||
all directories and for all files containing source code.
|
||||
|
||||
</P>
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
Once your <TT>`TAGS'</TT> file is ready, the following commands assist
|
||||
the programmer at marking translatable strings in his set of sources.
|
||||
But these commands are necessarily driven from within a PO file
|
||||
window, and it is likely that you do not even have such a PO file yet.
|
||||
This is not a problem at all, as you may safely open a new, empty PO
|
||||
file, mainly for using these commands. This empty PO file will slowly
|
||||
fill in while you mark strings as translatable in your program sources.
|
||||
|
||||
</P>
|
||||
<DL COMPACT>
|
||||
|
||||
<DT><KBD>,</KBD>
|
||||
<DD>
|
||||
Search through program sources for a string which looks like a
|
||||
candidate for translation.
|
||||
|
||||
<DT><KBD>M-,</KBD>
|
||||
<DD>
|
||||
Mark the last string found with <SAMP>`_()'</SAMP>.
|
||||
|
||||
<DT><KBD>M-.</KBD>
|
||||
<DD>
|
||||
Mark the last string found with a keyword taken from a set of possible
|
||||
keywords. This command with a prefix allows some management of these
|
||||
keywords.
|
||||
|
||||
</DL>
|
||||
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
The <KBD>,</KBD> (<CODE>po-tags-search</CODE>) command search for the next
|
||||
occurrence of a string which looks like a possible candidate for
|
||||
translation, and displays the program source in another Emacs window,
|
||||
positioned in such a way that the string is near the top of this other
|
||||
window. If the string is too big to fit whole in this window, it is
|
||||
positioned so only its end is shown. In any case, the cursor
|
||||
is left in the PO file window. If the shown string would be better
|
||||
presented differently in different native languages, you may mark it
|
||||
using <KBD>M-,</KBD> or <KBD>M-.</KBD>. Otherwise, you might rather ignore it
|
||||
and skip to the next string by merely repeating the <KBD>,</KBD> command.
|
||||
|
||||
</P>
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
A string is a good candidate for translation if it contains a sequence
|
||||
of three or more letters. A string containing at most two letters in
|
||||
a row will be considered as a candidate if it has more letters than
|
||||
non-letters. The command disregards strings containing no letters,
|
||||
or isolated letters only. It also disregards strings within comments,
|
||||
or strings already marked with some keyword PO mode knows (see below).
|
||||
|
||||
</P>
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
If you have never told Emacs about some <TT>`TAGS'</TT> file to use, the
|
||||
command will request that you specify one from the minibuffer, the
|
||||
first time you use the command. You may later change your <TT>`TAGS'</TT>
|
||||
file by using the regular Emacs command <KBD>M-x visit-tags-table</KBD>,
|
||||
which will ask you to name the precise <TT>`TAGS'</TT> file you want
|
||||
to use. See section `Tag Tables' in <CITE>The Emacs Editor</CITE>.
|
||||
|
||||
</P>
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
Each time you use the <KBD>,</KBD> command, the search resumes from where it was
|
||||
left by the previous search, and goes through all program sources,
|
||||
obeying the <TT>`TAGS'</TT> file, until all sources have been processed.
|
||||
However, by giving a prefix argument to the command (<KBD>C-u
|
||||
,)</KBD>, you may request that the search be restarted all over again
|
||||
from the first program source; but in this case, strings that you
|
||||
recently marked as translatable will be automatically skipped.
|
||||
|
||||
</P>
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
Using this <KBD>,</KBD> command does not prevent using of other regular
|
||||
Emacs tags commands. For example, regular <CODE>tags-search</CODE> or
|
||||
<CODE>tags-query-replace</CODE> commands may be used without disrupting the
|
||||
independent <KBD>,</KBD> search sequence. However, as implemented, the
|
||||
<EM>initial</EM> <KBD>,</KBD> command (or the <KBD>,</KBD> command is used with a
|
||||
prefix) might also reinitialize the regular Emacs tags searching to the
|
||||
first tags file, this reinitialization might be considered spurious.
|
||||
|
||||
</P>
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
The <KBD>M-,</KBD> (<CODE>po-mark-translatable</CODE>) command will mark the
|
||||
recently found string with the <SAMP>`_'</SAMP> keyword. The <KBD>M-.</KBD>
|
||||
(<CODE>po-select-mark-and-mark</CODE>) command will request that you type
|
||||
one keyword from the minibuffer and use that keyword for marking
|
||||
the string. Both commands will automatically create a new PO file
|
||||
untranslated entry for the string being marked, and make it the
|
||||
current entry (making it easy for you to immediately proceed to its
|
||||
translation, if you feel like doing it right away). It is possible
|
||||
that the modifications made to the program source by <KBD>M-,</KBD> or
|
||||
<KBD>M-.</KBD> render some source line longer than 80 columns, forcing you
|
||||
to break and re-indent this line differently. You may use the <KBD>O</KBD>
|
||||
command from PO mode, or any other window changing command from
|
||||
GNU Emacs, to break out into the program source window, and do any
|
||||
needed adjustments. You will have to use some regular Emacs command
|
||||
to return the cursor to the PO file window, if you want command
|
||||
<KBD>,</KBD> for the next string, say.
|
||||
|
||||
</P>
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
The <KBD>M-.</KBD> command has a few built-in speedups, so you do not
|
||||
have to explicitly type all keywords all the time. The first such
|
||||
speedup is that you are presented with a <EM>preferred</EM> keyword,
|
||||
which you may accept by merely typing <KBD><KBD>RET</KBD></KBD> at the prompt.
|
||||
The second speedup is that you may type any non-ambiguous prefix of the
|
||||
keyword you really mean, and the command will complete it automatically
|
||||
for you. This also means that PO mode has to <EM>know</EM> all
|
||||
your possible keywords, and that it will not accept mistyped keywords.
|
||||
|
||||
</P>
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
If you reply <KBD>?</KBD> to the keyword request, the command gives a
|
||||
list of all known keywords, from which you may choose. When the
|
||||
command is prefixed by an argument (<KBD>C-u M-.</KBD>), it inhibits
|
||||
updating any program source or PO file buffer, and does some simple
|
||||
keyword management instead. In this case, the command asks for a
|
||||
keyword, written in full, which becomes a new allowed keyword for
|
||||
later <KBD>M-.</KBD> commands. Moreover, this new keyword automatically
|
||||
becomes the <EM>preferred</EM> keyword for later commands. By typing
|
||||
an already known keyword in response to <KBD>C-u M-.</KBD>, one merely
|
||||
changes the <EM>preferred</EM> keyword and does nothing more.
|
||||
|
||||
</P>
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
All keywords known for <KBD>M-.</KBD> are recognized by the <KBD>,</KBD> command
|
||||
when scanning for strings, and strings already marked by any of those
|
||||
known keywords are automatically skipped. If many PO files are opened
|
||||
simultaneously, each one has its own independent set of known keywords.
|
||||
There is no provision in PO mode, currently, for deleting a known
|
||||
keyword, you have to quit the file (maybe using <KBD>q</KBD>) and reopen
|
||||
it afresh. When a PO file is newly brought up in an Emacs window, only
|
||||
<SAMP>`gettext'</SAMP> and <SAMP>`_'</SAMP> are known as keywords, and <SAMP>`gettext'</SAMP>
|
||||
is preferred for the <KBD>M-.</KBD> command. In fact, this is not useful to
|
||||
prefer <SAMP>`_'</SAMP>, as this one is already built in the <KBD>M-,</KBD> command.
|
||||
|
||||
</P>
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
<H2><A NAME="SEC17" HREF="gettext_toc.html#TOC17">Special Comments preceding Keywords</A></H2>
|
||||
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
In C programs strings are often used within calls of functions from the
|
||||
<CODE>printf</CODE> family. The special thing about these format strings is
|
||||
that they can contain format specifiers introduced with <KBD>%</KBD>. Assume
|
||||
we have the code
|
||||
|
||||
</P>
|
||||
|
||||
<PRE>
|
||||
printf (gettext ("String `%s' has %d characters\n"), s, strlen (s));
|
||||
</PRE>
|
||||
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
A possible German translation for the above string might be:
|
||||
|
||||
</P>
|
||||
|
||||
<PRE>
|
||||
"%d Zeichen lang ist die Zeichenkette `%s'"
|
||||
</PRE>
|
||||
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
A C programmer, even if he cannot speak German, will recognize that
|
||||
there is something wrong here. The order of the two format specifiers
|
||||
is changed but of course the arguments in the <CODE>printf</CODE> don't have.
|
||||
This will most probably lead to problems because now the length of the
|
||||
string is regarded as the address.
|
||||
|
||||
</P>
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
To prevent errors at runtime caused by translations the <CODE>msgfmt</CODE>
|
||||
tool can check statically whether the arguments in the original and the
|
||||
translation string match in type and number. If this is not the case a
|
||||
warning will be given and the error cannot causes problems at runtime.
|
||||
|
||||
</P>
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
If the word order in the above German translation would be correct one
|
||||
would have to write
|
||||
|
||||
</P>
|
||||
|
||||
<PRE>
|
||||
"%2$d Zeichen lang ist die Zeichenkette `%1$s'"
|
||||
</PRE>
|
||||
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
The routines in <CODE>msgfmt</CODE> know about this special notation.
|
||||
|
||||
</P>
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
Because not all strings in a program must be format strings it is not
|
||||
useful for <CODE>msgfmt</CODE> to test all the strings in the <TT>`.po'</TT> file.
|
||||
This might cause problems because the string might contain what looks
|
||||
like a format specifier, but the string is not used in <CODE>printf</CODE>.
|
||||
|
||||
</P>
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
Therefore the <CODE>xgettext</CODE> adds a special tag to those messages it
|
||||
thinks might be a format string. There is no absolute rule for this,
|
||||
only a heuristic. In the <TT>`.po'</TT> file the entry is marked using the
|
||||
<CODE>c-format</CODE> flag in the <KBD>#,</KBD> comment line (see section <A HREF="gettext_2.html#SEC9">The Format of PO Files</A>).
|
||||
|
||||
</P>
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
The careful reader now might say that this again can cause problems.
|
||||
The heuristic might guess it wrong. This is true and therefore
|
||||
<CODE>xgettext</CODE> knows about special kind of comment which lets
|
||||
the programmer take over the decision. If in the same line or
|
||||
the immediately preceding line of the <CODE>gettext</CODE> keyword
|
||||
the <CODE>xgettext</CODE> program find a comment containing the words
|
||||
<KBD>xgettext:c-format</KBD> it will mark the string in any case with
|
||||
the <KBD>c-format</KBD> flag. This kind of comment should be used when
|
||||
<CODE>xgettext</CODE> does not recognize the string as a format string but
|
||||
is really is one and it should be tested. Please note that when the
|
||||
comment is in the same line of the <CODE>gettext</CODE> keyword, it must be
|
||||
before the string to be translated.
|
||||
|
||||
</P>
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
This situation happens quite often. The <CODE>printf</CODE> function is often
|
||||
called with strings which do not contain a format specifier. Of course
|
||||
one would normally use <CODE>fputs</CODE> but it does happen. In this case
|
||||
<CODE>xgettext</CODE> does not recognize this as a format string but what
|
||||
happens if the translation introduces a valid format specifier? The
|
||||
<CODE>printf</CODE> function will try to access one of the parameter but none
|
||||
exists because the original code does not refer to any parameter.
|
||||
|
||||
</P>
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
<CODE>xgettext</CODE> of course could make a wrong decision the other way
|
||||
round. A string marked as a format string is not really a format
|
||||
string. In this case the <CODE>msgfmt</CODE> might give too many warnings and
|
||||
would prevent translating the <TT>`.po'</TT> file. The method to prevent
|
||||
this wrong decision is similar to the one used above, only the comment
|
||||
to use must contain the string <KBD>xgettext:no-c-format</KBD>.
|
||||
|
||||
</P>
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
If a string is marked with <KBD>c-format</KBD> and this is not correct the
|
||||
user can find out who is responsible for the decision. See section <A HREF="gettext_4.html#SEC20">Invoking the <CODE>xgettext</CODE> Program</A> to see how the <KBD>--debug</KBD> option can be used for solving
|
||||
this problem.
|
||||
|
||||
</P>
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
<H2><A NAME="SEC18" HREF="gettext_toc.html#TOC18">Special Cases of Translatable Strings</A></H2>
|
||||
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
The attentive reader might now point out that it is not always possible
|
||||
to mark translatable string with <CODE>gettext</CODE> or something like this.
|
||||
Consider the following case:
|
||||
|
||||
</P>
|
||||
|
||||
<PRE>
|
||||
{
|
||||
static const char *messages[] = {
|
||||
"some very meaningful message",
|
||||
"and another one"
|
||||
};
|
||||
const char *string;
|
||||
...
|
||||
string
|
||||
= index > 1 ? "a default message" : messages[index];
|
||||
|
||||
fputs (string);
|
||||
...
|
||||
}
|
||||
</PRE>
|
||||
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
While it is no problem to mark the string <CODE>"a default message"</CODE> it
|
||||
is not possible to mark the string initializers for <CODE>messages</CODE>.
|
||||
What is to be done? We have to fulfil two tasks. First we have to mark the
|
||||
strings so that the <CODE>xgettext</CODE> program (see section <A HREF="gettext_4.html#SEC20">Invoking the <CODE>xgettext</CODE> Program</A>)
|
||||
can find them, and second we have to translate the string at runtime
|
||||
before printing them.
|
||||
|
||||
</P>
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
The first task can be fulfilled by creating a new keyword, which names a
|
||||
no-op. For the second we have to mark all access points to a string
|
||||
from the array. So one solution can look like this:
|
||||
|
||||
</P>
|
||||
|
||||
<PRE>
|
||||
#define gettext_noop(String) (String)
|
||||
|
||||
{
|
||||
static const char *messages[] = {
|
||||
gettext_noop ("some very meaningful message"),
|
||||
gettext_noop ("and another one")
|
||||
};
|
||||
const char *string;
|
||||
...
|
||||
string
|
||||
= index > 1 ? gettext ("a default message") : gettext (messages[index]);
|
||||
|
||||
fputs (string);
|
||||
...
|
||||
}
|
||||
</PRE>
|
||||
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
Please convince yourself that the string which is written by
|
||||
<CODE>fputs</CODE> is translated in any case. How to get <CODE>xgettext</CODE> know
|
||||
the additional keyword <CODE>gettext_noop</CODE> is explained in section <A HREF="gettext_4.html#SEC20">Invoking the <CODE>xgettext</CODE> Program</A>.
|
||||
|
||||
</P>
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
The above is of course not the only solution. You could also come along
|
||||
with the following one:
|
||||
|
||||
</P>
|
||||
|
||||
<PRE>
|
||||
#define gettext_noop(String) (String)
|
||||
|
||||
{
|
||||
static const char *messages[] = {
|
||||
gettext_noop ("some very meaningful message",
|
||||
gettext_noop ("and another one")
|
||||
};
|
||||
const char *string;
|
||||
...
|
||||
string
|
||||
= index > 1 ? gettext_noop ("a default message") : messages[index];
|
||||
|
||||
fputs (gettext (string));
|
||||
...
|
||||
}
|
||||
</PRE>
|
||||
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
But this has some drawbacks. First the programmer has to take care that
|
||||
he uses <CODE>gettext_noop</CODE> for the string <CODE>"a default message"</CODE>.
|
||||
A use of <CODE>gettext</CODE> could have in rare cases unpredictable results.
|
||||
The second reason is found in the internals of the GNU <CODE>gettext</CODE>
|
||||
Library which will make this solution less efficient.
|
||||
|
||||
</P>
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
One advantage is that you need not make control flow analysis to make
|
||||
sure the output is really translated in any case. But this analysis is
|
||||
generally not very difficult. If it should be in any situation you can
|
||||
use this second method in this situation.
|
||||
|
||||
</P>
|
||||
<P><HR><P>
|
||||
<p>Go to the <A HREF="gettext_1.html">first</A>, <A HREF="gettext_2.html">previous</A>, <A HREF="gettext_4.html">next</A>, <A HREF="gettext_12.html">last</A> section, <A HREF="gettext_toc.html">table of contents</A>.
|
||||
</BODY>
|
||||
</HTML>
|
@ -1,337 +0,0 @@
|
||||
<HTML>
|
||||
<HEAD>
|
||||
<!-- This HTML file has been created by texi2html 1.54
|
||||
from gettext.texi on 25 January 1999 -->
|
||||
|
||||
<TITLE>GNU gettext utilities - Making the Initial PO File</TITLE>
|
||||
<link href="gettext_5.html" rel=Next>
|
||||
<link href="gettext_3.html" rel=Previous>
|
||||
<link href="gettext_toc.html" rel=ToC>
|
||||
|
||||
</HEAD>
|
||||
<BODY>
|
||||
<p>Go to the <A HREF="gettext_1.html">first</A>, <A HREF="gettext_3.html">previous</A>, <A HREF="gettext_5.html">next</A>, <A HREF="gettext_12.html">last</A> section, <A HREF="gettext_toc.html">table of contents</A>.
|
||||
<P><HR><P>
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
<H1><A NAME="SEC19" HREF="gettext_toc.html#TOC19">Making the Initial PO File</A></H1>
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
<H2><A NAME="SEC20" HREF="gettext_toc.html#TOC20">Invoking the <CODE>xgettext</CODE> Program</A></H2>
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
<PRE>
|
||||
xgettext [<VAR>option</VAR>] <VAR>inputfile</VAR> ...
|
||||
</PRE>
|
||||
|
||||
<DL COMPACT>
|
||||
|
||||
<DT><SAMP>`-a'</SAMP>
|
||||
<DD>
|
||||
<DT><SAMP>`--extract-all'</SAMP>
|
||||
<DD>
|
||||
Extract all strings.
|
||||
|
||||
<DT><SAMP>`-c [<VAR>tag</VAR>]'</SAMP>
|
||||
<DD>
|
||||
<DT><SAMP>`--add-comments[=<VAR>tag</VAR>]'</SAMP>
|
||||
<DD>
|
||||
Place comment block with <VAR>tag</VAR> (or those preceding keyword lines)
|
||||
in output file.
|
||||
|
||||
<DT><SAMP>`-C'</SAMP>
|
||||
<DD>
|
||||
<DT><SAMP>`--c++'</SAMP>
|
||||
<DD>
|
||||
Recognize C++ style comments.
|
||||
|
||||
<DT><SAMP>`--debug'</SAMP>
|
||||
<DD>
|
||||
Use the flags <KBD>c-format</KBD> and <KBD>possible-c-format</KBD> to show who was
|
||||
responsible for marking a message as a format string. The later form is
|
||||
used if the <CODE>xgettext</CODE> program decided, the format form is used if
|
||||
the programmer prescribed it.
|
||||
|
||||
By default only the <KBD>c-format</KBD> form is used. The translator should
|
||||
not have to care about these details.
|
||||
|
||||
<DT><SAMP>`-d <VAR>name</VAR>'</SAMP>
|
||||
<DD>
|
||||
<DT><SAMP>`--default-domain=<VAR>name</VAR>'</SAMP>
|
||||
<DD>
|
||||
Use <TT>`<VAR>name</VAR>.po'</TT> for output (instead of <TT>`messages.po'</TT>).
|
||||
|
||||
The special domain name <TT>`-'</TT> or <TT>`/dev/stdout'</TT> means to write
|
||||
the output to <TT>`stdout'</TT>.
|
||||
|
||||
<DT><SAMP>`-D <VAR>directory</VAR>'</SAMP>
|
||||
<DD>
|
||||
<DT><SAMP>`--directory=<VAR>directory</VAR>'</SAMP>
|
||||
<DD>
|
||||
Change to <VAR>directory</VAR> before beginning to search and scan source
|
||||
files. The resulting <TT>`.po'</TT> file will be written relative to the
|
||||
original directory, though.
|
||||
|
||||
<DT><SAMP>`-f <VAR>file</VAR>'</SAMP>
|
||||
<DD>
|
||||
<DT><SAMP>`--files-from=<VAR>file</VAR>'</SAMP>
|
||||
<DD>
|
||||
Read the names of the input files from <VAR>file</VAR> instead of getting
|
||||
them from the command line.
|
||||
|
||||
<DT><SAMP>`--force'</SAMP>
|
||||
<DD>
|
||||
Always write output file even if no message is defined.
|
||||
|
||||
<DT><SAMP>`-h'</SAMP>
|
||||
<DD>
|
||||
<DT><SAMP>`--help'</SAMP>
|
||||
<DD>
|
||||
Display this help and exit.
|
||||
|
||||
<DT><SAMP>`-I <VAR>list</VAR>'</SAMP>
|
||||
<DD>
|
||||
<DT><SAMP>`--input-path=<VAR>list</VAR>'</SAMP>
|
||||
<DD>
|
||||
List of directories searched for input files.
|
||||
|
||||
<DT><SAMP>`-j'</SAMP>
|
||||
<DD>
|
||||
<DT><SAMP>`--join-existing'</SAMP>
|
||||
<DD>
|
||||
Join messages with existing file.
|
||||
|
||||
<DT><SAMP>`-k <VAR>word</VAR>'</SAMP>
|
||||
<DD>
|
||||
<DT><SAMP>`--keyword[=<VAR>word</VAR>]'</SAMP>
|
||||
<DD>
|
||||
Additional keyword to be looked for (without <VAR>word</VAR> means not to
|
||||
use default keywords).
|
||||
|
||||
The default keywords, which are always looked for if not explicitly
|
||||
disabled, are <CODE>gettext</CODE>, <CODE>dgettext</CODE>, <CODE>dcgettext</CODE> and
|
||||
<CODE>gettext_noop</CODE>.
|
||||
|
||||
<DT><SAMP>`-m [<VAR>string</VAR>]'</SAMP>
|
||||
<DD>
|
||||
<DT><SAMP>`--msgstr-prefix[=<VAR>string</VAR>]'</SAMP>
|
||||
<DD>
|
||||
Use <VAR>string</VAR> or "" as prefix for msgstr entries.
|
||||
|
||||
<DT><SAMP>`-M [<VAR>string</VAR>]'</SAMP>
|
||||
<DD>
|
||||
<DT><SAMP>`--msgstr-suffix[=<VAR>string</VAR>]'</SAMP>
|
||||
<DD>
|
||||
Use <VAR>string</VAR> or "" as suffix for msgstr entries.
|
||||
|
||||
<DT><SAMP>`--no-location'</SAMP>
|
||||
<DD>
|
||||
Do not write <SAMP>`#: <VAR>filename</VAR>:<VAR>line</VAR>'</SAMP> lines.
|
||||
|
||||
<DT><SAMP>`-n'</SAMP>
|
||||
<DD>
|
||||
<DT><SAMP>`--add-location'</SAMP>
|
||||
<DD>
|
||||
Generate <SAMP>`#: <VAR>filename</VAR>:<VAR>line</VAR>'</SAMP> lines (default).
|
||||
|
||||
<DT><SAMP>`--omit-header'</SAMP>
|
||||
<DD>
|
||||
Don't write header with <SAMP>`msgid ""'</SAMP> entry.
|
||||
|
||||
This is useful for testing purposes because it eliminates a source
|
||||
of variance for generated <CODE>.gmo</CODE> files. We can ship some of
|
||||
these files in the GNU <CODE>gettext</CODE> package, and the result of
|
||||
regenerating them through <CODE>msgfmt</CODE> should yield the same values.
|
||||
|
||||
<DT><SAMP>`-p <VAR>dir</VAR>'</SAMP>
|
||||
<DD>
|
||||
<DT><SAMP>`--output-dir=<VAR>dir</VAR>'</SAMP>
|
||||
<DD>
|
||||
Output files will be placed in directory <VAR>dir</VAR>.
|
||||
|
||||
<DT><SAMP>`-s'</SAMP>
|
||||
<DD>
|
||||
<DT><SAMP>`--sort-output'</SAMP>
|
||||
<DD>
|
||||
Generate sorted output and remove duplicates.
|
||||
|
||||
<DT><SAMP>`--strict'</SAMP>
|
||||
<DD>
|
||||
Write out strict Uniforum conforming PO file.
|
||||
|
||||
<DT><SAMP>`-v'</SAMP>
|
||||
<DD>
|
||||
<DT><SAMP>`--version'</SAMP>
|
||||
<DD>
|
||||
Output version information and exit.
|
||||
|
||||
<DT><SAMP>`-x <VAR>file</VAR>'</SAMP>
|
||||
<DD>
|
||||
<DT><SAMP>`--exclude-file=<VAR>file</VAR>'</SAMP>
|
||||
<DD>
|
||||
Entries from <VAR>file</VAR> are not extracted.
|
||||
|
||||
</DL>
|
||||
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
Search path for supplementary PO files is:
|
||||
<TT>`/usr/local/share/nls/src/'</TT>.
|
||||
|
||||
</P>
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
If <VAR>inputfile</VAR> is <SAMP>`-'</SAMP>, standard input is read.
|
||||
|
||||
</P>
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
This implementation of <CODE>xgettext</CODE> is able to process a few awkward
|
||||
cases, like strings in preprocessor macros, ANSI concatenation of
|
||||
adjacent strings, and escaped end of lines for continued strings.
|
||||
|
||||
</P>
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
<H2><A NAME="SEC21" HREF="gettext_toc.html#TOC21">C Sources Context</A></H2>
|
||||
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
PO mode is particularly powerful when used with PO files
|
||||
created through GNU <CODE>gettext</CODE> utilities, as those utilities
|
||||
insert special comments in the PO files they generate.
|
||||
Some of these special comments relate the PO file entry to
|
||||
exactly where the untranslated string appears in the program sources.
|
||||
|
||||
</P>
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
When the translator gets to an untranslated entry, she is fairly
|
||||
often faced with an original string which is not as informative as
|
||||
it normally should be, being succinct, cryptic, or otherwise ambiguous.
|
||||
Before choosing how to translate the string, she needs to understand
|
||||
better what the string really means and how tight the translation has
|
||||
to be. Most of the time, when problems arise, the only way left to make
|
||||
her judgment is looking at the true program sources from where this
|
||||
string originated, searching for surrounding comments the programmer
|
||||
might have put in there, and looking around for helping clues of
|
||||
<EM>any</EM> kind.
|
||||
|
||||
</P>
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
Surely, when looking at program sources, the translator will receive
|
||||
more help if she is a fluent programmer. However, even if she is
|
||||
not versed in programming and feels a little lost in C code, the
|
||||
translator should not be shy at taking a look, once in a while.
|
||||
It is most probable that she will still be able to find some of the
|
||||
hints she needs. She will learn quickly to not feel uncomfortable
|
||||
in program code, paying more attention to programmer's comments,
|
||||
variable and function names (if he dared choosing them well), and
|
||||
overall organization, than to the program code itself.
|
||||
|
||||
</P>
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
The following commands are meant to help the translator at getting
|
||||
program source context for a PO file entry.
|
||||
|
||||
</P>
|
||||
<DL COMPACT>
|
||||
|
||||
<DT><KBD>s</KBD>
|
||||
<DD>
|
||||
Resume the display of a program source context, or cycle through them.
|
||||
|
||||
<DT><KBD>M-s</KBD>
|
||||
<DD>
|
||||
Display of a program source context selected by menu.
|
||||
|
||||
<DT><KBD>S</KBD>
|
||||
<DD>
|
||||
Add a directory to the search path for source files.
|
||||
|
||||
<DT><KBD>M-S</KBD>
|
||||
<DD>
|
||||
Delete a directory from the search path for source files.
|
||||
|
||||
</DL>
|
||||
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
The commands <KBD>s</KBD> (<CODE>po-cycle-reference</CODE>) and <KBD>M-s</KBD>
|
||||
(<CODE>po-select-source-reference</CODE>) both open another window displaying
|
||||
some source program file, and already positioned in such a way that
|
||||
it shows an actual use of the string to be translated. By doing
|
||||
so, the command gives source program context for the string. But if
|
||||
the entry has no source context references, or if all references
|
||||
are unresolved along the search path for program sources, then the
|
||||
command diagnoses this as an error.
|
||||
|
||||
</P>
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
Even if <KBD>s</KBD> (or <KBD>M-s</KBD>) opens a new window, the cursor stays
|
||||
in the PO file window. If the translator really wants to
|
||||
get into the program source window, she ought to do it explicitly,
|
||||
maybe by using command <KBD>O</KBD>.
|
||||
|
||||
</P>
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
When <KBD>s</KBD> is typed for the first time, or for a PO file entry which
|
||||
is different of the last one used for getting source context, then the
|
||||
command reacts by giving the first context available for this entry,
|
||||
if any. If some context has already been recently displayed for the
|
||||
current PO file entry, and the translator wandered off to do other
|
||||
things, typing <KBD>s</KBD> again will merely resume, in another window,
|
||||
the context last displayed. In particular, if the translator moved
|
||||
the cursor away from the context in the source file, the command will
|
||||
bring the cursor back to the context. By using <KBD>s</KBD> many times
|
||||
in a row, with no other commands intervening, PO mode will cycle to
|
||||
the next available contexts for this particular entry, getting back
|
||||
to the first context once the last has been shown.
|
||||
|
||||
</P>
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
The command <KBD>M-s</KBD> behaves differently. Instead of cycling through
|
||||
references, it lets the translator choose of particular reference among
|
||||
many, and displays that reference. It is best used with completion,
|
||||
if the translator types <KBD>TAB</KBD> immediately after <KBD>M-s</KBD>, in
|
||||
response to the question, she will be offered a menu of all possible
|
||||
references, as a reminder of which are the acceptable answers.
|
||||
This command is useful only where there are really many contexts
|
||||
available for a single string to translate.
|
||||
|
||||
</P>
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
Program source files are usually found relative to where the PO
|
||||
file stands. As a special provision, when this fails, the file is
|
||||
also looked for, but relative to the directory immediately above it.
|
||||
Those two cases take proper care of most PO files. However, it might
|
||||
happen that a PO file has been moved, or is edited in a different
|
||||
place than its normal location. When this happens, the translator
|
||||
should tell PO mode in which directory normally sits the genuine PO
|
||||
file. Many such directories may be specified, and all together, they
|
||||
constitute what is called the <STRONG>search path</STRONG> for program sources.
|
||||
The command <KBD>S</KBD> (<CODE>po-consider-source-path</CODE>) is used to interactively
|
||||
enter a new directory at the front of the search path, and the command
|
||||
<KBD>M-S</KBD> (<CODE>po-ignore-source-path</CODE>) is used to select, with completion,
|
||||
one of the directories she does not want anymore on the search path.
|
||||
|
||||
</P>
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
<H2><A NAME="SEC22" HREF="gettext_toc.html#TOC22">Using Translation Compendiums</A></H2>
|
||||
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
Compendiums are yet to be implemented.
|
||||
|
||||
</P>
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
An incoming PO mode feature will let the translator maintain a
|
||||
compendium of already achieved translations. A <STRONG>compendium</STRONG>
|
||||
is a special PO file containing a set of translations recurring in
|
||||
many different packages. The translator will be given commands for
|
||||
adding entries to her compendium, and later initializing untranslated
|
||||
entries, or updating already translated entries, from translations
|
||||
kept in the compendium. For this to work, however, the compendium
|
||||
would have to be normalized. See section <A HREF="gettext_2.html#SEC12">Normalizing Strings in Entries</A>.
|
||||
|
||||
</P>
|
||||
|
||||
<P><HR><P>
|
||||
<p>Go to the <A HREF="gettext_1.html">first</A>, <A HREF="gettext_3.html">previous</A>, <A HREF="gettext_5.html">next</A>, <A HREF="gettext_12.html">last</A> section, <A HREF="gettext_toc.html">table of contents</A>.
|
||||
</BODY>
|
||||
</HTML>
|
@ -1,747 +0,0 @@
|
||||
<HTML>
|
||||
<HEAD>
|
||||
<!-- This HTML file has been created by texi2html 1.54
|
||||
from gettext.texi on 25 January 1999 -->
|
||||
|
||||
<TITLE>GNU gettext utilities - Updating Existing PO Files</TITLE>
|
||||
<link href="gettext_6.html" rel=Next>
|
||||
<link href="gettext_4.html" rel=Previous>
|
||||
<link href="gettext_toc.html" rel=ToC>
|
||||
|
||||
</HEAD>
|
||||
<BODY>
|
||||
<p>Go to the <A HREF="gettext_1.html">first</A>, <A HREF="gettext_4.html">previous</A>, <A HREF="gettext_6.html">next</A>, <A HREF="gettext_12.html">last</A> section, <A HREF="gettext_toc.html">table of contents</A>.
|
||||
<P><HR><P>
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
<H1><A NAME="SEC23" HREF="gettext_toc.html#TOC23">Updating Existing PO Files</A></H1>
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
<H2><A NAME="SEC24" HREF="gettext_toc.html#TOC24">Invoking the <CODE>msgmerge</CODE> Program</A></H2>
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
<H2><A NAME="SEC25" HREF="gettext_toc.html#TOC25">Translated Entries</A></H2>
|
||||
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
Each PO file entry for which the <CODE>msgstr</CODE> field has been filled with
|
||||
a translation, and which is not marked as fuzzy (see section <A HREF="gettext_5.html#SEC26">Fuzzy Entries</A>),
|
||||
is a said to be a <STRONG>translated</STRONG> entry. Only translated entries will
|
||||
later be compiled by GNU <CODE>msgfmt</CODE> and become usable in programs.
|
||||
Other entry types will be excluded; translation will not occur for them.
|
||||
|
||||
</P>
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
Some commands are more specifically related to translated entry processing.
|
||||
|
||||
</P>
|
||||
<DL COMPACT>
|
||||
|
||||
<DT><KBD>t</KBD>
|
||||
<DD>
|
||||
Find the next translated entry.
|
||||
|
||||
<DT><KBD>M-t</KBD>
|
||||
<DD>
|
||||
Find the previous translated entry.
|
||||
|
||||
</DL>
|
||||
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
The commands <KBD>t</KBD> (<CODE>po-next-translated-entry</CODE>) and <KBD>M-t</KBD>
|
||||
(<CODE>po-previous-transted-entry</CODE>) move forwards or backwards, chasing
|
||||
for an translated entry. If none is found, the search is extended and
|
||||
wraps around in the PO file buffer.
|
||||
|
||||
</P>
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
Translated entries usually result from the translator having edited in
|
||||
a translation for them, section <A HREF="gettext_5.html#SEC29">Modifying Translations</A>. However, if the
|
||||
variable <CODE>po-auto-fuzzy-on-edit</CODE> is not <CODE>nil</CODE>, the entry having
|
||||
received a new translation first becomes a fuzzy entry, which ought to
|
||||
be later unfuzzied before becoming an official, genuine translated entry.
|
||||
See section <A HREF="gettext_5.html#SEC26">Fuzzy Entries</A>.
|
||||
|
||||
</P>
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
<H2><A NAME="SEC26" HREF="gettext_toc.html#TOC26">Fuzzy Entries</A></H2>
|
||||
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
Each PO file entry may have a set of <STRONG>attributes</STRONG>, which are
|
||||
qualities given an name and explicitly associated with the entry
|
||||
translation, using a special system comment. One of these attributes
|
||||
has the name <CODE>fuzzy</CODE>, and entries having this attribute are said
|
||||
to have a fuzzy translation. They are called fuzzy entries, for short.
|
||||
|
||||
</P>
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
Fuzzy entries, even if they account for translated entries for
|
||||
most other purposes, usually call for revision by the translator.
|
||||
Those may be produced by applying the program <CODE>msgmerge</CODE> to
|
||||
update an older translated PO files according to a new PO template
|
||||
file, when this tool hypothesises that some new <CODE>msgid</CODE> has
|
||||
been modified only slightly out of an older one, and chooses to pair
|
||||
what it thinks to be the old translation for the new modified entry.
|
||||
The slight alteration in the original string (the <CODE>msgid</CODE> string)
|
||||
should often be reflected in the translated string, and this requires
|
||||
the intervention of the translator. For this reason, <CODE>msgmerge</CODE>
|
||||
might mark some entries as being fuzzy.
|
||||
|
||||
</P>
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
Also, the translator may decide herself to mark an entry as fuzzy
|
||||
for her own convenience, when she wants to remember that the entry
|
||||
has to be later revisited. So, some commands are more specifically
|
||||
related to fuzzy entry processing.
|
||||
|
||||
</P>
|
||||
<DL COMPACT>
|
||||
|
||||
<DT><KBD>f</KBD>
|
||||
<DD>
|
||||
Find the next fuzzy entry.
|
||||
|
||||
<DT><KBD>M-f</KBD>
|
||||
<DD>
|
||||
Find the previous fuzzy entry.
|
||||
|
||||
<DT><KBD>TAB</KBD>
|
||||
<DD>
|
||||
Remove the fuzzy attribute of the current entry.
|
||||
|
||||
</DL>
|
||||
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
The commands <KBD>f</KBD> (<CODE>po-next-fuzzy</CODE>) and <KBD>M-f</KBD>
|
||||
(<CODE>po-previous-fuzzy</CODE>) move forwards or backwards, chasing for
|
||||
a fuzzy entry. If none is found, the search is extended and wraps
|
||||
around in the PO file buffer.
|
||||
|
||||
</P>
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
The command <KBD>TAB</KBD> (<CODE>po-unfuzzy</CODE>) removes the fuzzy
|
||||
attribute associated with an entry, usually leaving it translated.
|
||||
Further, if the variable <CODE>po-auto-select-on-unfuzzy</CODE> has not
|
||||
the <CODE>nil</CODE> value, the <KBD>TAB</KBD> command will automatically chase
|
||||
for another interesting entry to work on. The initial value of
|
||||
<CODE>po-auto-select-on-unfuzzy</CODE> is <CODE>nil</CODE>.
|
||||
|
||||
</P>
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
The initial value of <CODE>po-auto-fuzzy-on-edit</CODE> is <CODE>nil</CODE>. However,
|
||||
if the variable <CODE>po-auto-fuzzy-on-edit</CODE> is set to <CODE>t</CODE>, any entry
|
||||
edited through the <KBD>RET</KBD> command is marked fuzzy, as a way to ensure
|
||||
some kind of double check, later. In this case, the usual paradigm is
|
||||
that an entry becomes fuzzy (if not already) whenever the translator
|
||||
modifies it. If she is satisfied with the translation, she then uses
|
||||
<KBD>TAB</KBD> to pick another entry to work on, clearing the fuzzy attribute
|
||||
on the same blow. If she is not satisfied yet, she merely uses <KBD>SPC</KBD>
|
||||
to chase another entry, leaving the entry fuzzy.
|
||||
|
||||
</P>
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
The translator may also use the <KBD>DEL</KBD> command
|
||||
(<CODE>po-fade-out-entry</CODE>) over any translated entry to mark it as being
|
||||
fuzzy, when she wants to easily leave a trace she wants to later return
|
||||
working at this entry.
|
||||
|
||||
</P>
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
Also, when time comes to quit working on a PO file buffer with the <KBD>q</KBD>
|
||||
command, the translator is asked for confirmation, if fuzzy string
|
||||
still exists.
|
||||
|
||||
</P>
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
<H2><A NAME="SEC27" HREF="gettext_toc.html#TOC27">Untranslated Entries</A></H2>
|
||||
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
When <CODE>xgettext</CODE> originally creates a PO file, unless told
|
||||
otherwise, it initializes the <CODE>msgid</CODE> field with the untranslated
|
||||
string, and leaves the <CODE>msgstr</CODE> string to be empty. Such entries,
|
||||
having an empty translation, are said to be <STRONG>untranslated</STRONG> entries.
|
||||
Later, when the programmer slightly modifies some string right in
|
||||
the program, this change is later reflected in the PO file
|
||||
by the appearance of a new untranslated entry for the modified string.
|
||||
|
||||
</P>
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
The usual commands moving from entry to entry consider untranslated
|
||||
entries on the same level as active entries. Untranslated entries
|
||||
are easily recognizable by the fact they end with <SAMP>`msgstr ""'</SAMP>.
|
||||
|
||||
</P>
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
The work of the translator might be (quite naively) seen as the process
|
||||
of seeking after an untranslated entry, editing a translation for
|
||||
it, and repeating these actions until no untranslated entries remain.
|
||||
Some commands are more specifically related to untranslated entry
|
||||
processing.
|
||||
|
||||
</P>
|
||||
<DL COMPACT>
|
||||
|
||||
<DT><KBD>u</KBD>
|
||||
<DD>
|
||||
Find the next untranslated entry.
|
||||
|
||||
<DT><KBD>M-u</KBD>
|
||||
<DD>
|
||||
Find the previous untranslated entry.
|
||||
|
||||
<DT><KBD>k</KBD>
|
||||
<DD>
|
||||
Turn the current entry into an untranslated one.
|
||||
|
||||
</DL>
|
||||
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
The commands <KBD>u</KBD> (<CODE>po-next-untranslated-entry</CODE>) and <KBD>M-u</KBD>
|
||||
(<CODE>po-previous-untransted-entry</CODE>) move forwards or backwards,
|
||||
chasing for an untranslated entry. If none is found, the search is
|
||||
extended and wraps around in the PO file buffer.
|
||||
|
||||
</P>
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
An entry can be turned back into an untranslated entry by
|
||||
merely emptying its translation, using the command <KBD>k</KBD>
|
||||
(<CODE>po-kill-msgstr</CODE>). See section <A HREF="gettext_5.html#SEC29">Modifying Translations</A>.
|
||||
|
||||
</P>
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
Also, when time comes to quit working on a PO file buffer
|
||||
with the <KBD>q</KBD> command, the translator is asked for confirmation,
|
||||
if some untranslated string still exists.
|
||||
|
||||
</P>
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
<H2><A NAME="SEC28" HREF="gettext_toc.html#TOC28">Obsolete Entries</A></H2>
|
||||
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
By <STRONG>obsolete</STRONG> PO file entries, we mean those entries which are
|
||||
commented out, usually by <CODE>msgmerge</CODE> when it found that the
|
||||
translation is not needed anymore by the package being localized.
|
||||
|
||||
</P>
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
The usual commands moving from entry to entry consider obsolete
|
||||
entries on the same level as active entries. Obsolete entries are
|
||||
easily recognizable by the fact that all their lines start with
|
||||
<KBD>#</KBD>, even those lines containing <CODE>msgid</CODE> or <CODE>msgstr</CODE>.
|
||||
|
||||
</P>
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
Commands exist for emptying the translation or reinitializing it
|
||||
to the original untranslated string. Commands interfacing with the
|
||||
kill ring may force some previously saved text into the translation.
|
||||
The user may interactively edit the translation. All these commands
|
||||
may apply to obsolete entries, carefully leaving the entry obsolete
|
||||
after the fact.
|
||||
|
||||
</P>
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
Moreover, some commands are more specifically related to obsolete
|
||||
entry processing.
|
||||
|
||||
</P>
|
||||
<DL COMPACT>
|
||||
|
||||
<DT><KBD>o</KBD>
|
||||
<DD>
|
||||
Find the next obsolete entry.
|
||||
|
||||
<DT><KBD>M-o</KBD>
|
||||
<DD>
|
||||
Find the previous obsolete entry.
|
||||
|
||||
<DT><KBD>DEL</KBD>
|
||||
<DD>
|
||||
Make an active entry obsolete, or zap out an obsolete entry.
|
||||
|
||||
</DL>
|
||||
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
The commands <KBD>o</KBD> (<CODE>po-next-obsolete-entry</CODE>) and <KBD>M-o</KBD>
|
||||
(<CODE>po-previous-obsolete-entry</CODE>) move forwards or backwards,
|
||||
chasing for an obsolete entry. If none is found, the search is
|
||||
extended and wraps around in the PO file buffer.
|
||||
|
||||
</P>
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
PO mode does not provide ways for un-commenting an obsolete entry
|
||||
and making it active, because this would reintroduce an original
|
||||
untranslated string which does not correspond to any marked string
|
||||
in the program sources. This goes with the philosophy of never
|
||||
introducing useless <CODE>msgid</CODE> values.
|
||||
|
||||
</P>
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
However, it is possible to comment out an active entry, so making
|
||||
it obsolete. GNU <CODE>gettext</CODE> utilities will later react to the
|
||||
disappearance of a translation by using the untranslated string.
|
||||
The command <KBD>DEL</KBD> (<CODE>po-fade-out-entry</CODE>) pushes the current entry
|
||||
a little further towards annihilation. If the entry is active (it is a
|
||||
translated entry), then it is first made fuzzy. If it is already fuzzy,
|
||||
then the entry is merely commented out, with confirmation. If the entry
|
||||
is already obsolete, then it is completely deleted from the PO file.
|
||||
It is easy to recycle the translation so deleted into some other PO file
|
||||
entry, usually one which is untranslated. See section <A HREF="gettext_5.html#SEC29">Modifying Translations</A>.
|
||||
|
||||
</P>
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
Here is a quite interesting problem to solve for later development of
|
||||
PO mode, for those nights you are not sleepy. The idea would be that
|
||||
PO mode might become bright enough, one of these days, to make good
|
||||
guesses at retrieving the most probable candidate, among all obsolete
|
||||
entries, for initializing the translation of a newly appeared string.
|
||||
I think it might be a quite hard problem to do this algorithmically, as
|
||||
we have to develop good and efficient measures of string similarity.
|
||||
Right now, PO mode completely lets the decision to the translator,
|
||||
when the time comes to find the adequate obsolete translation, it
|
||||
merely tries to provide handy tools for helping her to do so.
|
||||
|
||||
</P>
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
<H2><A NAME="SEC29" HREF="gettext_toc.html#TOC29">Modifying Translations</A></H2>
|
||||
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
PO mode prevents direct edition of the PO file, by the usual
|
||||
means Emacs give for altering a buffer's contents. By doing so,
|
||||
it pretends helping the translator to avoid little clerical errors
|
||||
about the overall file format, or the proper quoting of strings,
|
||||
as those errors would be easily made. Other kinds of errors are
|
||||
still possible, but some may be caught and diagnosed by the batch
|
||||
validation process, which the translator may always trigger by the
|
||||
<KBD>V</KBD> command. For all other errors, the translator has to rely on
|
||||
her own judgment, and also on the linguistic reports submitted to her
|
||||
by the users of the translated package, having the same mother tongue.
|
||||
|
||||
</P>
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
When the time comes to create a translation, correct an error diagnosed
|
||||
mechanically or reported by a user, the translators have to resort to
|
||||
using the following commands for modifying the translations.
|
||||
|
||||
</P>
|
||||
<DL COMPACT>
|
||||
|
||||
<DT><KBD>RET</KBD>
|
||||
<DD>
|
||||
Interactively edit the translation.
|
||||
|
||||
<DT><KBD>LFD</KBD>
|
||||
<DD>
|
||||
Reinitialize the translation with the original, untranslated string.
|
||||
|
||||
<DT><KBD>k</KBD>
|
||||
<DD>
|
||||
Save the translation on the kill ring, and delete it.
|
||||
|
||||
<DT><KBD>w</KBD>
|
||||
<DD>
|
||||
Save the translation on the kill ring, without deleting it.
|
||||
|
||||
<DT><KBD>y</KBD>
|
||||
<DD>
|
||||
Replace the translation, taking the new from the kill ring.
|
||||
|
||||
</DL>
|
||||
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
The command <KBD>RET</KBD> (<CODE>po-edit-msgstr</CODE>) opens a new Emacs window
|
||||
containing a copy of the translation taken from the current PO file entry,
|
||||
all ready for edition, fully modifiable and with the complete extent of
|
||||
GNU Emacs modifying commands. The string is presented to the translator
|
||||
expunged of all quoting marks, and she will modify the <EM>unquoted</EM>
|
||||
string in this window to heart's content. Once done, the regular Emacs
|
||||
command <KBD>M-C-c</KBD> (<CODE>exit-recursive-edit</CODE>) may be used to return the
|
||||
edited translation into the PO file, replacing the original translation.
|
||||
The keys <KBD>C-c C-c</KBD> are bound so they have the same effect as
|
||||
<KBD>M-C-c</KBD>.
|
||||
|
||||
</P>
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
If the translator becomes unsatisfied with her translation to the extent
|
||||
she prefers keeping the translation which was existent prior to the
|
||||
<KBD>RET</KBD> command, she may use the standard Emacs command <KBD>C-]</KBD>
|
||||
(<CODE>abort-recursive-edit</CODE>) to merely get rid of edition, while
|
||||
preserving the original translation. The keys <KBD>C-c C-k</KBD> are
|
||||
bound so they have the same effect as <KBD>C-]</KBD>. Another way would
|
||||
be for her to exit normally with <KBD>C-c C-c</KBD>, then type <CODE>U</CODE>
|
||||
once for undoing the whole effect of last edition.
|
||||
|
||||
</P>
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
Functions found on <CODE>po-subedit-mode-hook</CODE>, if any, are executed after
|
||||
the string has been inserted in the edit buffer and before recursive edit
|
||||
is entered.
|
||||
|
||||
</P>
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
While editing her translation, the translator should pay attention to
|
||||
not inserting unwanted <KBD><KBD>RET</KBD></KBD> (carriage returns) characters at
|
||||
the end of the translated string if those are not meant to be there,
|
||||
or to removing such characters when they are required. Since these
|
||||
characters are not visible in the editing buffer, they are easily
|
||||
introduced by mistake. To help her, <KBD><KBD>RET</KBD></KBD> automatically puts
|
||||
the character <KBD><</KBD> at the end of the string being edited, but this
|
||||
<KBD><</KBD> is not really part of the string. On exiting the editing
|
||||
window with <KBD>C-c C-c</KBD>, PO mode automatically removes such
|
||||
<KBD><</KBD> and all whitespace added after it. If the translator adds
|
||||
characters after the terminating <KBD><</KBD>, it looses its delimiting
|
||||
property and integrally becomes part of the string. If she removes
|
||||
the delimiting <KBD><</KBD>, then the edited string is taken <EM>as
|
||||
is</EM>, with all trailing newlines, even if invisible. Also, if the
|
||||
translated string ought to end itself with a genuine <KBD><</KBD>, then the
|
||||
delimiting <KBD><</KBD> may not be removed; so the string should appear,
|
||||
in the editing window, as ending with two <KBD><</KBD> in a row.
|
||||
|
||||
</P>
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
When a translation (or a comment) is being edited, the translator
|
||||
may move the cursor back into the PO file buffer and freely
|
||||
move to other entries, browsing at will. The edited entry will
|
||||
be recovered as soon as the edit ceases, because it is this entry
|
||||
only which is being modified. If, with an edition still opened, the
|
||||
translator wanders in the PO file buffer, she cannot modify
|
||||
any other entry. If she tries to, PO mode will react by suggesting
|
||||
that she abort the current edit, or else, by inviting her to finish
|
||||
the current edit prior to any other modification.
|
||||
|
||||
</P>
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
The command <KBD>LFD</KBD> (<CODE>po-msgid-to-msgstr</CODE>) initializes, or
|
||||
reinitializes the translation with the original string. This command
|
||||
is normally used when the translator wants to redo a fresh translation
|
||||
of the original string, disregarding any previous work.
|
||||
|
||||
</P>
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
It is possible to arrange so, whenever editing an untranslated
|
||||
entry, the <KBD>LFD</KBD> command be automatically executed. If you set
|
||||
<CODE>po-auto-edit-with-msgid</CODE> to <CODE>t</CODE>, the translation gets
|
||||
initialised with the original string, in case none exist already.
|
||||
The default value for <CODE>po-auto-edit-with-msgid</CODE> is <CODE>nil</CODE>.
|
||||
|
||||
</P>
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
In fact, whether it is best to start a translation with an empty
|
||||
string, or rather with a copy of the original string, is a matter of
|
||||
taste or habit. Sometimes, the source language and the
|
||||
target language are so different that is simply best to start writing
|
||||
on an empty page. At other times, the source and target languages
|
||||
are so close that it would be a waste to retype a number of words
|
||||
already being written in the original string. A translator may also
|
||||
like having the original string right under her eyes, as she will
|
||||
progressively overwrite the original text with the translation, even
|
||||
if this requires some extra editing work to get rid of the original.
|
||||
|
||||
</P>
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
The command <KBD>k</KBD> (<CODE>po-kill-msgstr</CODE>) merely empties the
|
||||
translation string, so turning the entry into an untranslated
|
||||
one. But while doing so, its previous contents is put apart in
|
||||
a special place, known as the kill ring. The command <KBD>w</KBD>
|
||||
(<CODE>po-kill-ring-save-msgstr</CODE>) has also the effect of taking a
|
||||
copy of the translation onto the kill ring, but it otherwise leaves
|
||||
the entry alone, and does <EM>not</EM> remove the translation from the
|
||||
entry. Both commands use exactly the Emacs kill ring, which is shared
|
||||
between buffers, and which is well known already to GNU Emacs lovers.
|
||||
|
||||
</P>
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
The translator may use <KBD>k</KBD> or <KBD>w</KBD> many times in the course
|
||||
of her work, as the kill ring may hold several saved translations.
|
||||
From the kill ring, strings may later be reinserted in various
|
||||
Emacs buffers. In particular, the kill ring may be used for moving
|
||||
translation strings between different entries of a single PO file
|
||||
buffer, or if the translator is handling many such buffers at once,
|
||||
even between PO files.
|
||||
|
||||
</P>
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
To facilitate exchanges with buffers which are not in PO mode, the
|
||||
translation string put on the kill ring by the <KBD>k</KBD> command is fully
|
||||
unquoted before being saved: external quotes are removed, multi-lines
|
||||
strings are concatenated, and backslashed escaped sequences are turned
|
||||
into their corresponding characters. In the special case of obsolete
|
||||
entries, the translation is also uncommented prior to saving.
|
||||
|
||||
</P>
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
The command <KBD>y</KBD> (<CODE>po-yank-msgstr</CODE>) completely replaces the
|
||||
translation of the current entry by a string taken from the kill ring.
|
||||
Following GNU Emacs terminology, we then say that the replacement
|
||||
string is <STRONG>yanked</STRONG> into the PO file buffer.
|
||||
See section `Yanking' in <CITE>The Emacs Editor</CITE>.
|
||||
The first time <KBD>y</KBD> is used, the translation receives the value of
|
||||
the most recent addition to the kill ring. If <KBD>y</KBD> is typed once
|
||||
again, immediately, without intervening keystrokes, the translation
|
||||
just inserted is taken away and replaced by the second most recent
|
||||
addition to the kill ring. By repeating <KBD>y</KBD> many times in a row,
|
||||
the translator may travel along the kill ring for saved strings,
|
||||
until she finds the string she really wanted.
|
||||
|
||||
</P>
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
When a string is yanked into a PO file entry, it is fully and
|
||||
automatically requoted for complying with the format PO files should
|
||||
have. Further, if the entry is obsolete, PO mode then appropriately
|
||||
push the inserted string inside comments. Once again, translators
|
||||
should not burden themselves with quoting considerations besides, of
|
||||
course, the necessity of the translated string itself respective to
|
||||
the program using it.
|
||||
|
||||
</P>
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
Note that <KBD>k</KBD> or <KBD>w</KBD> are not the only commands pushing strings
|
||||
on the kill ring, as almost any PO mode command replacing translation
|
||||
strings (or the translator comments) automatically save the old string
|
||||
on the kill ring. The main exceptions to this general rule are the
|
||||
yanking commands themselves.
|
||||
|
||||
</P>
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
To better illustrate the operation of killing and yanking, let's
|
||||
use an actual example, taken from a common situation. When the
|
||||
programmer slightly modifies some string right in the program, his
|
||||
change is later reflected in the PO file by the appearance
|
||||
of a new untranslated entry for the modified string, and the fact
|
||||
that the entry translating the original or unmodified string becomes
|
||||
obsolete. In many cases, the translator might spare herself some work
|
||||
by retrieving the unmodified translation from the obsolete entry,
|
||||
then initializing the untranslated entry <CODE>msgstr</CODE> field with
|
||||
this retrieved translation. Once this done, the obsolete entry is
|
||||
not wanted anymore, and may be safely deleted.
|
||||
|
||||
</P>
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
When the translator finds an untranslated entry and suspects that a
|
||||
slight variant of the translation exists, she immediately uses <KBD>m</KBD>
|
||||
to mark the current entry location, then starts chasing obsolete
|
||||
entries with <KBD>o</KBD>, hoping to find some translation corresponding
|
||||
to the unmodified string. Once found, she uses the <KBD>DEL</KBD> command
|
||||
for deleting the obsolete entry, knowing that <KBD>DEL</KBD> also <EM>kills</EM>
|
||||
the translation, that is, pushes the translation on the kill ring.
|
||||
Then, <KBD>r</KBD> returns to the initial untranslated entry, <KBD>y</KBD>
|
||||
then <EM>yanks</EM> the saved translation right into the <CODE>msgstr</CODE>
|
||||
field. The translator is then free to use <KBD><KBD>RET</KBD></KBD> for fine
|
||||
tuning the translation contents, and maybe to later use <KBD>u</KBD>,
|
||||
then <KBD>m</KBD> again, for going on with the next untranslated string.
|
||||
|
||||
</P>
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
When some sequence of keys has to be typed over and over again, the
|
||||
translator may find it useful to become better acquainted with the GNU
|
||||
Emacs capability of learning these sequences and playing them back under
|
||||
request. See section `Keyboard Macros' in <CITE>The Emacs Editor</CITE>.
|
||||
|
||||
</P>
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
<H2><A NAME="SEC30" HREF="gettext_toc.html#TOC30">Modifying Comments</A></H2>
|
||||
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
Any translation work done seriously will raise many linguistic
|
||||
difficulties, for which decisions have to be made, and the choices
|
||||
further documented. These documents may be saved within the
|
||||
PO file in form of translator comments, which the translator
|
||||
is free to create, delete, or modify at will. These comments may
|
||||
be useful to herself when she returns to this PO file after a while.
|
||||
|
||||
</P>
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
Comments not having whitespace after the initial <SAMP>`#'</SAMP>, for example,
|
||||
those beginning with <SAMP>`#.'</SAMP> or <SAMP>`#:'</SAMP>, are <EM>not</EM> translator
|
||||
comments, they are exclusively created by other <CODE>gettext</CODE> tools.
|
||||
So, the commands below will never alter such system added comments,
|
||||
they are not meant for the translator to modify. See section <A HREF="gettext_2.html#SEC9">The Format of PO Files</A>.
|
||||
|
||||
</P>
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
The following commands are somewhat similar to those modifying translations,
|
||||
so the general indications given for those apply here. See section <A HREF="gettext_5.html#SEC29">Modifying Translations</A>.
|
||||
|
||||
</P>
|
||||
<DL COMPACT>
|
||||
|
||||
<DT><KBD>#</KBD>
|
||||
<DD>
|
||||
Interactively edit the translator comments.
|
||||
|
||||
<DT><KBD>K</KBD>
|
||||
<DD>
|
||||
Save the translator comments on the kill ring, and delete it.
|
||||
|
||||
<DT><KBD>W</KBD>
|
||||
<DD>
|
||||
Save the translator comments on the kill ring, without deleting it.
|
||||
|
||||
<DT><KBD>Y</KBD>
|
||||
<DD>
|
||||
Replace the translator comments, taking the new from the kill ring.
|
||||
|
||||
</DL>
|
||||
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
These commands parallel PO mode commands for modifying the translation
|
||||
strings, and behave much the same way as they do, except that they handle
|
||||
this part of PO file comments meant for translator usage, rather
|
||||
than the translation strings. So, if the descriptions given below are
|
||||
slightly succinct, it is because the full details have already been given.
|
||||
See section <A HREF="gettext_5.html#SEC29">Modifying Translations</A>.
|
||||
|
||||
</P>
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
The command <KBD>#</KBD> (<CODE>po-edit-comment</CODE>) opens a new Emacs
|
||||
window containing a copy of the translator comments on the current
|
||||
PO file entry. If there are no such comments, PO mode
|
||||
understands that the translator wants to add a comment to the entry,
|
||||
and she is presented with an empty screen. Comment marks (<KBD>#</KBD>) and
|
||||
the space following them are automatically removed before edition,
|
||||
and reinstated after. For translator comments pertaining to obsolete
|
||||
entries, the uncommenting and recommenting operations are done twice.
|
||||
Once in the editing window, the keys <KBD>C-c C-c</KBD> allow the
|
||||
translator to tell she is finished with editing the comment.
|
||||
|
||||
</P>
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
Functions found on <CODE>po-subedit-mode-hook</CODE>, if any, are executed after
|
||||
the string has been inserted in the edit buffer and before recursive edit
|
||||
is entered.
|
||||
|
||||
</P>
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
The command <KBD>K</KBD> (<CODE>po-kill-comment</CODE>) get rid of all
|
||||
translator comments, while saving those comments on the kill ring.
|
||||
The command <KBD>W</KBD> (<CODE>po-kill-ring-save-comment</CODE>) takes
|
||||
a copy of the translator comments on the kill ring, but leaves
|
||||
them undisturbed in the current entry. The command <KBD>Y</KBD>
|
||||
(<CODE>po-yank-comment</CODE>) completely replaces the translator comments
|
||||
by a string taken at the front of the kill ring. When this command
|
||||
is immediately repeated, the comments just inserted are withdrawn,
|
||||
and replaced by other strings taken along the kill ring.
|
||||
|
||||
</P>
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
On the kill ring, all strings have the same nature. There is no
|
||||
distinction between <EM>translation</EM> strings and <EM>translator
|
||||
comments</EM> strings. So, for example, let's presume the translator
|
||||
has just finished editing a translation, and wants to create a new
|
||||
translator comment to document why the previous translation was
|
||||
not good, just to remember what was the problem. Foreseeing that she
|
||||
will do that in her documentation, the translator may want to quote
|
||||
the previous translation in her translator comments. To do so, she
|
||||
may initialize the translator comments with the previous translation,
|
||||
still at the head of the kill ring. Because editing already pushed the
|
||||
previous translation on the kill ring, she merely has to type <KBD>M-w</KBD>
|
||||
prior to <KBD>#</KBD>, and the previous translation will be right there,
|
||||
all ready for being introduced by some explanatory text.
|
||||
|
||||
</P>
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
On the other hand, presume there are some translator comments already
|
||||
and that the translator wants to add to those comments, instead
|
||||
of wholly replacing them. Then, she should edit the comment right
|
||||
away with <KBD>#</KBD>. Once inside the editing window, she can use the
|
||||
regular GNU Emacs commands <KBD>C-y</KBD> (<CODE>yank</CODE>) and <KBD>M-y</KBD>
|
||||
(<CODE>yank-pop</CODE>) to get the previous translation where she likes.
|
||||
|
||||
</P>
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
<H2><A NAME="SEC31" HREF="gettext_toc.html#TOC31">Consulting Auxiliary PO Files</A></H2>
|
||||
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
PO mode is able to help the knowledgeable translator, being fluent in
|
||||
many languages, at taking advantage of translations already achieved
|
||||
in other languages she just happens to know. It provides these other
|
||||
language translations as additional context for her own work. Moreover,
|
||||
it has features to ease the production of translations for many languages
|
||||
at once, for translators preferring to work in this way.
|
||||
|
||||
</P>
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
An <STRONG>auxiliary</STRONG> PO file is an existing PO file meant for the same
|
||||
package the translator is working on, but targeted to a different mother
|
||||
tongue language. Commands exist for declaring and handling auxiliary
|
||||
PO files, and also for showing contexts for the entry under work.
|
||||
|
||||
</P>
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
Here are the auxiliary file commands available in PO mode.
|
||||
|
||||
</P>
|
||||
<DL COMPACT>
|
||||
|
||||
<DT><KBD>a</KBD>
|
||||
<DD>
|
||||
Seek auxiliary files for another translation for the same entry.
|
||||
|
||||
<DT><KBD>M-a</KBD>
|
||||
<DD>
|
||||
Switch to a particular auxiliary file.
|
||||
|
||||
<DT><KBD>A</KBD>
|
||||
<DD>
|
||||
Declare this PO file as an auxiliary file.
|
||||
|
||||
<DT><KBD>M-A</KBD>
|
||||
<DD>
|
||||
Remove this PO file from the list of auxiliary files.
|
||||
|
||||
</DL>
|
||||
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
Command <KBD>A</KBD> (<CODE>po-consider-as-auxiliary</CODE>) adds the current
|
||||
PO file to the list of auxiliary files, while command <KBD>M-A</KBD>
|
||||
(<CODE>po-ignore-as-auxiliary</CODE> just removes it.
|
||||
|
||||
</P>
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
The command <KBD>a</KBD> (<CODE>po-cycle-auxiliary</CODE>) seeks all auxiliary PO
|
||||
files, round-robin, searching for a translated entry in some other language
|
||||
having an <CODE>msgid</CODE> field identical as the one for the current entry.
|
||||
The found PO file, if any, takes the place of the current PO file in
|
||||
the display (its window gets on top). Before doing so, the current PO
|
||||
file is also made into an auxiliary file, if not already. So, <KBD>a</KBD>
|
||||
in this newly displayed PO file will seek another PO file, and so on,
|
||||
so repeating <KBD>a</KBD> will eventually yield back the original PO file.
|
||||
|
||||
</P>
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
The command <KBD>M-a</KBD> (<CODE>po-select-auxiliary</CODE>) asks the translator
|
||||
for her choice of a particular auxiliary file, with completion, and
|
||||
then switches to that selected PO file. The command also checks if
|
||||
the selected file has an <CODE>msgid</CODE> field identical as the one for
|
||||
the current entry, and if yes, this entry becomes current. Otherwise,
|
||||
the cursor of the selected file is left undisturbed.
|
||||
|
||||
</P>
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
For all this to work fully, auxiliary PO files will have to be normalized,
|
||||
in that way that <CODE>msgid</CODE> fields should be written <EM>exactly</EM>
|
||||
the same way. It is possible to write <CODE>msgid</CODE> fields in various
|
||||
ways for representing the same string, different writing would break the
|
||||
proper behaviour of the auxiliary file commands of PO mode. This is not
|
||||
expected to be much a problem in practice, as most existing PO files have
|
||||
their <CODE>msgid</CODE> entries written by the same GNU <CODE>gettext</CODE> tools.
|
||||
|
||||
</P>
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
However, PO files initially created by PO mode itself, while marking
|
||||
strings in source files, are normalised differently. So are PO
|
||||
files resulting of the the <SAMP>`M-x normalize'</SAMP> command. Until these
|
||||
discrepancies between PO mode and other GNU <CODE>gettext</CODE> tools get
|
||||
fully resolved, the translator should stay aware of normalisation issues.
|
||||
|
||||
</P>
|
||||
<P><HR><P>
|
||||
<p>Go to the <A HREF="gettext_1.html">first</A>, <A HREF="gettext_4.html">previous</A>, <A HREF="gettext_6.html">next</A>, <A HREF="gettext_12.html">last</A> section, <A HREF="gettext_toc.html">table of contents</A>.
|
||||
</BODY>
|
||||
</HTML>
|
@ -1,258 +0,0 @@
|
||||
<HTML>
|
||||
<HEAD>
|
||||
<!-- This HTML file has been created by texi2html 1.54
|
||||
from gettext.texi on 25 January 1999 -->
|
||||
|
||||
<TITLE>GNU gettext utilities - Producing Binary MO Files</TITLE>
|
||||
<link href="gettext_7.html" rel=Next>
|
||||
<link href="gettext_5.html" rel=Previous>
|
||||
<link href="gettext_toc.html" rel=ToC>
|
||||
|
||||
</HEAD>
|
||||
<BODY>
|
||||
<p>Go to the <A HREF="gettext_1.html">first</A>, <A HREF="gettext_5.html">previous</A>, <A HREF="gettext_7.html">next</A>, <A HREF="gettext_12.html">last</A> section, <A HREF="gettext_toc.html">table of contents</A>.
|
||||
<P><HR><P>
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
<H1><A NAME="SEC32" HREF="gettext_toc.html#TOC32">Producing Binary MO Files</A></H1>
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
<H2><A NAME="SEC33" HREF="gettext_toc.html#TOC33">Invoking the <CODE>msgfmt</CODE> Program</A></H2>
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
<PRE>
|
||||
Usage: msgfmt [<VAR>option</VAR>] <VAR>filename</VAR>.po ...
|
||||
</PRE>
|
||||
|
||||
<DL COMPACT>
|
||||
|
||||
<DT><SAMP>`-a <VAR>number</VAR>'</SAMP>
|
||||
<DD>
|
||||
<DT><SAMP>`--alignment=<VAR>number</VAR>'</SAMP>
|
||||
<DD>
|
||||
Align strings to <VAR>number</VAR> bytes (default: 1).
|
||||
|
||||
<DT><SAMP>`-h'</SAMP>
|
||||
<DD>
|
||||
<DT><SAMP>`--help'</SAMP>
|
||||
<DD>
|
||||
Display this help and exit.
|
||||
|
||||
<DT><SAMP>`--no-hash'</SAMP>
|
||||
<DD>
|
||||
Binary file will not include the hash table.
|
||||
|
||||
<DT><SAMP>`-o <VAR>file</VAR>'</SAMP>
|
||||
<DD>
|
||||
<DT><SAMP>`--output-file=<VAR>file</VAR>'</SAMP>
|
||||
<DD>
|
||||
Specify output file name as <VAR>file</VAR>.
|
||||
|
||||
<DT><SAMP>`--strict'</SAMP>
|
||||
<DD>
|
||||
Direct the program to work strictly following the Uniforum/Sun
|
||||
implementation. Currently this only affects the naming of the output
|
||||
file. If this option is not given the name of the output file is the
|
||||
same as the domain name. If the strict Uniforum mode is enable the
|
||||
suffix <TT>`.mo'</TT> is added to the file name if it is not already
|
||||
present.
|
||||
|
||||
We find this behaviour of Sun's implementation rather silly and so by
|
||||
default this mode is <EM>not</EM> selected.
|
||||
|
||||
<DT><SAMP>`-v'</SAMP>
|
||||
<DD>
|
||||
<DT><SAMP>`--verbose'</SAMP>
|
||||
<DD>
|
||||
Detect and diagnose input file anomalies which might represent
|
||||
translation errors. The <CODE>msgid</CODE> and <CODE>msgstr</CODE> strings are
|
||||
studied and compared. It is considered abnormal that one string
|
||||
starts or ends with a newline while the other does not.
|
||||
|
||||
Also, if the string represents a format string used in a
|
||||
<CODE>printf</CODE>-like function both strings should have the same number of
|
||||
<SAMP>`%'</SAMP> format specifiers, with matching types. If the flag
|
||||
<CODE>c-format</CODE> or <CODE>possible-c-format</CODE> appears in the special
|
||||
comment <KBD>#,</KBD> for this entry a check is performed. For example, the
|
||||
check will diagnose using <SAMP>`%.*s'</SAMP> against <SAMP>`%s'</SAMP>, or <SAMP>`%d'</SAMP>
|
||||
against <SAMP>`%s'</SAMP>, or <SAMP>`%d'</SAMP> against <SAMP>`%x'</SAMP>. It can even handle
|
||||
positional parameters.
|
||||
|
||||
Normally the <CODE>xgettext</CODE> program automatically decides whether a
|
||||
string is a format string or not. This algorithm is not perfect,
|
||||
though. It might regard a string as a format string though it is not
|
||||
used in a <CODE>printf</CODE>-like function and so <CODE>msgfmt</CODE> might report
|
||||
errors where there are none. Or the other way round: a string is not
|
||||
regarded as a format string but it is used in a <CODE>printf</CODE>-like
|
||||
function.
|
||||
|
||||
So solve this problem the programmer can dictate the decision to the
|
||||
<CODE>xgettext</CODE> program (see section <A HREF="gettext_3.html#SEC17">Special Comments preceding Keywords</A>). The translator should not
|
||||
consider removing the flag from the <KBD>#,</KBD> line. This "fix" would be
|
||||
reversed again as soon as <CODE>msgmerge</CODE> is called the next time.
|
||||
|
||||
<DT><SAMP>`-V'</SAMP>
|
||||
<DD>
|
||||
<DT><SAMP>`--version'</SAMP>
|
||||
<DD>
|
||||
Output version information and exit.
|
||||
|
||||
</DL>
|
||||
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
If input file is <SAMP>`-'</SAMP>, standard input is read. If output file
|
||||
is <SAMP>`-'</SAMP>, output is written to standard output.
|
||||
|
||||
</P>
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
<H2><A NAME="SEC34" HREF="gettext_toc.html#TOC34">The Format of GNU MO Files</A></H2>
|
||||
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
The format of the generated MO files is best described by a picture,
|
||||
which appears below.
|
||||
|
||||
</P>
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
The first two words serve the identification of the file. The magic
|
||||
number will always signal GNU MO files. The number is stored in the
|
||||
byte order of the generating machine, so the magic number really is
|
||||
two numbers: <CODE>0x950412de</CODE> and <CODE>0xde120495</CODE>. The second
|
||||
word describes the current revision of the file format. For now the
|
||||
revision is 0. This might change in future versions, and ensures
|
||||
that the readers of MO files can distinguish new formats from old
|
||||
ones, so that both can be handled correctly. The version is kept
|
||||
separate from the magic number, instead of using different magic
|
||||
numbers for different formats, mainly because <TT>`/etc/magic'</TT> is
|
||||
not updated often. It might be better to have magic separated from
|
||||
internal format version identification.
|
||||
|
||||
</P>
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
Follow a number of pointers to later tables in the file, allowing
|
||||
for the extension of the prefix part of MO files without having to
|
||||
recompile programs reading them. This might become useful for later
|
||||
inserting a few flag bits, indication about the charset used, new
|
||||
tables, or other things.
|
||||
|
||||
</P>
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
Then, at offset <VAR>O</VAR> and offset <VAR>T</VAR> in the picture, two tables
|
||||
of string descriptors can be found. In both tables, each string
|
||||
descriptor uses two 32 bits integers, one for the string length,
|
||||
another for the offset of the string in the MO file, counting in bytes
|
||||
from the start of the file. The first table contains descriptors
|
||||
for the original strings, and is sorted so the original strings
|
||||
are in increasing lexicographical order. The second table contains
|
||||
descriptors for the translated strings, and is parallel to the first
|
||||
table: to find the corresponding translation one has to access the
|
||||
array slot in the second array with the same index.
|
||||
|
||||
</P>
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
Having the original strings sorted enables the use of simple binary
|
||||
search, for when the MO file does not contain an hashing table, or
|
||||
for when it is not practical to use the hashing table provided in
|
||||
the MO file. This also has another advantage, as the empty string
|
||||
in a PO file GNU <CODE>gettext</CODE> is usually <EM>translated</EM> into
|
||||
some system information attached to that particular MO file, and the
|
||||
empty string necessarily becomes the first in both the original and
|
||||
translated tables, making the system information very easy to find.
|
||||
|
||||
</P>
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
The size <VAR>S</VAR> of the hash table can be zero. In this case, the
|
||||
hash table itself is not contained in the MO file. Some people might
|
||||
prefer this because a precomputed hashing table takes disk space, and
|
||||
does not win <EM>that</EM> much speed. The hash table contains indices
|
||||
to the sorted array of strings in the MO file. Conflict resolution is
|
||||
done by double hashing. The precise hashing algorithm used is fairly
|
||||
dependent of GNU <CODE>gettext</CODE> code, and is not documented here.
|
||||
|
||||
</P>
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
As for the strings themselves, they follow the hash file, and each
|
||||
is terminated with a <KBD>NUL</KBD>, and this <KBD>NUL</KBD> is not counted in
|
||||
the length which appears in the string descriptor. The <CODE>msgfmt</CODE>
|
||||
program has an option selecting the alignment for MO file strings.
|
||||
With this option, each string is separately aligned so it starts at
|
||||
an offset which is a multiple of the alignment value. On some RISC
|
||||
machines, a correct alignment will speed things up.
|
||||
|
||||
</P>
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
Nothing prevents a MO file from having embedded <KBD>NUL</KBD>s in strings.
|
||||
However, the program interface currently used already presumes
|
||||
that strings are <KBD>NUL</KBD> terminated, so embedded <KBD>NUL</KBD>s are
|
||||
somewhat useless. But MO file format is general enough so other
|
||||
interfaces would be later possible, if for example, we ever want to
|
||||
implement wide characters right in MO files, where <KBD>NUL</KBD> bytes may
|
||||
accidently appear.
|
||||
|
||||
</P>
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
This particular issue has been strongly debated in the GNU
|
||||
<CODE>gettext</CODE> development forum, and it is expectable that MO file
|
||||
format will evolve or change over time. It is even possible that many
|
||||
formats may later be supported concurrently. But surely, we have to
|
||||
start somewhere, and the MO file format described here is a good start.
|
||||
Nothing is cast in concrete, and the format may later evolve fairly
|
||||
easily, so we should feel comfortable with the current approach.
|
||||
|
||||
</P>
|
||||
|
||||
<PRE>
|
||||
byte
|
||||
+------------------------------------------+
|
||||
0 | magic number = 0x950412de |
|
||||
| |
|
||||
4 | file format revision = 0 |
|
||||
| |
|
||||
8 | number of strings | == N
|
||||
| |
|
||||
12 | offset of table with original strings | == O
|
||||
| |
|
||||
16 | offset of table with translation strings | == T
|
||||
| |
|
||||
20 | size of hashing table | == S
|
||||
| |
|
||||
24 | offset of hashing table | == H
|
||||
| |
|
||||
. .
|
||||
. (possibly more entries later) .
|
||||
. .
|
||||
| |
|
||||
O | length & offset 0th string ----------------.
|
||||
O + 8 | length & offset 1st string ------------------.
|
||||
... ... | |
|
||||
O + ((N-1)*8)| length & offset (N-1)th string | | |
|
||||
| | | |
|
||||
T | length & offset 0th translation ---------------.
|
||||
T + 8 | length & offset 1st translation -----------------.
|
||||
... ... | | | |
|
||||
T + ((N-1)*8)| length & offset (N-1)th translation | | | | |
|
||||
| | | | | |
|
||||
H | start hash table | | | | |
|
||||
... ... | | | |
|
||||
H + S * 4 | end hash table | | | | |
|
||||
| | | | | |
|
||||
| NUL terminated 0th string <----------------' | | |
|
||||
| | | | |
|
||||
| NUL terminated 1st string <------------------' | |
|
||||
| | | |
|
||||
... ... | |
|
||||
| | | |
|
||||
| NUL terminated 0th translation <---------------' |
|
||||
| | |
|
||||
| NUL terminated 1st translation <-----------------'
|
||||
| |
|
||||
... ...
|
||||
| |
|
||||
+------------------------------------------+
|
||||
</PRE>
|
||||
|
||||
<P><HR><P>
|
||||
<p>Go to the <A HREF="gettext_1.html">first</A>, <A HREF="gettext_5.html">previous</A>, <A HREF="gettext_7.html">next</A>, <A HREF="gettext_12.html">last</A> section, <A HREF="gettext_toc.html">table of contents</A>.
|
||||
</BODY>
|
||||
</HTML>
|
@ -1,122 +0,0 @@
|
||||
<HTML>
|
||||
<HEAD>
|
||||
<!-- This HTML file has been created by texi2html 1.54
|
||||
from gettext.texi on 25 January 1999 -->
|
||||
|
||||
<TITLE>GNU gettext utilities - The User's View</TITLE>
|
||||
<link href="gettext_8.html" rel=Next>
|
||||
<link href="gettext_6.html" rel=Previous>
|
||||
<link href="gettext_toc.html" rel=ToC>
|
||||
|
||||
</HEAD>
|
||||
<BODY>
|
||||
<p>Go to the <A HREF="gettext_1.html">first</A>, <A HREF="gettext_6.html">previous</A>, <A HREF="gettext_8.html">next</A>, <A HREF="gettext_12.html">last</A> section, <A HREF="gettext_toc.html">table of contents</A>.
|
||||
<P><HR><P>
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
<H1><A NAME="SEC35" HREF="gettext_toc.html#TOC35">The User's View</A></H1>
|
||||
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
When GNU <CODE>gettext</CODE> will truly have reached is goal, average users
|
||||
should feel some kind of astonished pleasure, seeing the effect of
|
||||
that strange kind of magic that just makes their own native language
|
||||
appear everywhere on their screens. As for naive users, they would
|
||||
ideally have no special pleasure about it, merely taking their own
|
||||
language for <EM>granted</EM>, and becoming rather unhappy otherwise.
|
||||
|
||||
</P>
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
So, let's try to describe here how we would like the magic to operate,
|
||||
as we want the users' view to be the simplest, among all ways one
|
||||
could look at GNU <CODE>gettext</CODE>. All other software engineers:
|
||||
programmers, translators, maintainers, should work together in such a
|
||||
way that the magic becomes possible. This is a long and progressive
|
||||
undertaking, and information is available about the progress of the
|
||||
Translation Project.
|
||||
|
||||
</P>
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
When a package is distributed, there are two kind of users:
|
||||
<STRONG>installers</STRONG> who fetch the distribution, unpack it, configure
|
||||
it, compile it and install it for themselves or others to use; and
|
||||
<STRONG>end users</STRONG> that call programs of the package, once these have
|
||||
been installed at their site. GNU <CODE>gettext</CODE> is offering magic
|
||||
for both installers and end users.
|
||||
|
||||
</P>
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
<H2><A NAME="SEC36" HREF="gettext_toc.html#TOC36">The Current <TT>`ABOUT-NLS'</TT> Matrix</A></H2>
|
||||
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
Languages are not equally supported in all packages using GNU
|
||||
<CODE>gettext</CODE>. To know if some package uses GNU <CODE>gettext</CODE>, one
|
||||
may check the distribution for the <TT>`ABOUT-NLS'</TT> information file, for
|
||||
some <TT>`<VAR>ll</VAR>.po'</TT> files, often kept together into some <TT>`po/'</TT>
|
||||
directory, or for an <TT>`intl/'</TT> directory. Internationalized packages
|
||||
have usually many <TT>`<VAR>ll</VAR>.po'</TT> files, where <VAR>ll</VAR> represents
|
||||
the language. section <A HREF="gettext_7.html#SEC38">Magic for End Users</A> for a complete description of the format
|
||||
for <VAR>ll</VAR>.
|
||||
|
||||
</P>
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
More generally, a matrix is available for showing the current state
|
||||
of the Translation Project, listing which packages are prepared for
|
||||
multi-lingual messages, and which languages is supported by each.
|
||||
Because this information changes often, this matrix is not kept within
|
||||
this GNU <CODE>gettext</CODE> manual. This information is often found in
|
||||
file <TT>`ABOUT-NLS'</TT> from various distributions, but is also as old as
|
||||
the distribution itself. A recent copy of this <TT>`ABOUT-NLS'</TT> file,
|
||||
containing up-to-date information, should generally be found on the
|
||||
Translation Project sites, and also on most GNU archive sites.
|
||||
|
||||
</P>
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
<H2><A NAME="SEC37" HREF="gettext_toc.html#TOC37">Magic for Installers</A></H2>
|
||||
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
By default, packages fully using GNU <CODE>gettext</CODE>, internally,
|
||||
are installed in such a way that they to allow translation of
|
||||
messages. At <EM>configuration</EM> time, those packages should
|
||||
automatically detect whether the underlying host system provides usable
|
||||
<CODE>catgets</CODE> or <CODE>gettext</CODE> functions. If neither is present,
|
||||
the GNU <CODE>gettext</CODE> library should be automatically prepared
|
||||
and used. Installers may use special options at configuration
|
||||
time for changing this behavior. The command <SAMP>`./configure
|
||||
--with-included-gettext'</SAMP> bypasses system <CODE>catgets</CODE> or <CODE>gettext</CODE> to
|
||||
use GNU <CODE>gettext</CODE> instead, while <SAMP>`./configure --disable-nls'</SAMP>
|
||||
produces program totally unable to translate messages.
|
||||
|
||||
</P>
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
Internationalized packages have usually many <TT>`<VAR>ll</VAR>.po'</TT>
|
||||
files. Unless
|
||||
translations are disabled, all those available are installed together
|
||||
with the package. However, the environment variable <CODE>LINGUAS</CODE>
|
||||
may be set, prior to configuration, to limit the installed set.
|
||||
<CODE>LINGUAS</CODE> should then contain a space separated list of two-letter
|
||||
codes, stating which languages are allowed.
|
||||
|
||||
</P>
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
<H2><A NAME="SEC38" HREF="gettext_toc.html#TOC38">Magic for End Users</A></H2>
|
||||
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
We consider here those packages using GNU <CODE>gettext</CODE> internally,
|
||||
and for which the installers did not disable translation at
|
||||
<EM>configure</EM> time. Then, users only have to set the <CODE>LANG</CODE>
|
||||
environment variable to the appropriate <SAMP>`<VAR>ll</VAR>'</SAMP> prior to
|
||||
using the programs in the package. See section <A HREF="gettext_7.html#SEC36">The Current <TT>`ABOUT-NLS'</TT> Matrix</A>. For example,
|
||||
let's presume a German site. At the shell prompt, users merely have to
|
||||
execute <SAMP>`setenv LANG de'</SAMP> (in <CODE>csh</CODE>) or <SAMP>`export
|
||||
LANG; LANG=de'</SAMP> (in <CODE>sh</CODE>). They could even do this from their
|
||||
<TT>`.login'</TT> or <TT>`.profile'</TT> file.
|
||||
|
||||
</P>
|
||||
<P><HR><P>
|
||||
<p>Go to the <A HREF="gettext_1.html">first</A>, <A HREF="gettext_6.html">previous</A>, <A HREF="gettext_8.html">next</A>, <A HREF="gettext_12.html">last</A> section, <A HREF="gettext_toc.html">table of contents</A>.
|
||||
</BODY>
|
||||
</HTML>
|
@ -1,896 +0,0 @@
|
||||
<HTML>
|
||||
<HEAD>
|
||||
<!-- This HTML file has been created by texi2html 1.54
|
||||
from gettext.texi on 25 January 1999 -->
|
||||
|
||||
<TITLE>GNU gettext utilities - The Programmer's View</TITLE>
|
||||
<link href="gettext_9.html" rel=Next>
|
||||
<link href="gettext_7.html" rel=Previous>
|
||||
<link href="gettext_toc.html" rel=ToC>
|
||||
|
||||
</HEAD>
|
||||
<BODY>
|
||||
<p>Go to the <A HREF="gettext_1.html">first</A>, <A HREF="gettext_7.html">previous</A>, <A HREF="gettext_9.html">next</A>, <A HREF="gettext_12.html">last</A> section, <A HREF="gettext_toc.html">table of contents</A>.
|
||||
<P><HR><P>
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
<H1><A NAME="SEC39" HREF="gettext_toc.html#TOC39">The Programmer's View</A></H1>
|
||||
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
One aim of the current message catalog implementation provided by
|
||||
GNU <CODE>gettext</CODE> was to use the systems message catalog handling, if the
|
||||
installer wishes to do so. So we perhaps should first take a look at
|
||||
the solutions we know about. The people in the POSIX committee does not
|
||||
manage to agree on one of the semi-official standards which we'll
|
||||
describe below. In fact they couldn't agree on anything, so nothing
|
||||
decide only to include an example of an interface. The major Unix vendors
|
||||
are split in the usage of the two most important specifications: X/Opens
|
||||
catgets vs. Uniforums gettext interface. We'll describe them both and
|
||||
later explain our solution of this dilemma.
|
||||
|
||||
</P>
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
<H2><A NAME="SEC40" HREF="gettext_toc.html#TOC40">About <CODE>catgets</CODE></A></H2>
|
||||
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
The <CODE>catgets</CODE> implementation is defined in the X/Open Portability
|
||||
Guide, Volume 3, XSI Supplementary Definitions, Chapter 5. But the
|
||||
process of creating this standard seemed to be too slow for some of
|
||||
the Unix vendors so they created their implementations on preliminary
|
||||
versions of the standard. Of course this leads again to problems while
|
||||
writing platform independent programs: even the usage of <CODE>catgets</CODE>
|
||||
does not guarantee a unique interface.
|
||||
|
||||
</P>
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
Another, personal comment on this that only a bunch of committee members
|
||||
could have made this interface. They never really tried to program
|
||||
using this interface. It is a fast, memory-saving implementation, an
|
||||
user can happily live with it. But programmers hate it (at least me and
|
||||
some others do...)
|
||||
|
||||
</P>
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
But we must not forget one point: after all the trouble with transfering
|
||||
the rights on Unix(tm) they at last came to X/Open, the very same who
|
||||
published this specifications. This leads me to making the prediction
|
||||
that this interface will be in future Unix standards (e.g. Spec1170) and
|
||||
therefore part of all Unix implementation (implementations, which are
|
||||
<EM>allowed</EM> to wear this name).
|
||||
|
||||
</P>
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
<H3><A NAME="SEC41" HREF="gettext_toc.html#TOC41">The Interface</A></H3>
|
||||
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
The interface to the <CODE>catgets</CODE> implementation consists of three
|
||||
functions which correspond to those used in file access: <CODE>catopen</CODE>
|
||||
to open the catalog for using, <CODE>catgets</CODE> for accessing the message
|
||||
tables, and <CODE>catclose</CODE> for closing after work is done. Prototypes
|
||||
for the functions and the needed definitions are in the
|
||||
<CODE><nl_types.h></CODE> header file.
|
||||
|
||||
</P>
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
<CODE>catopen</CODE> is used like in this:
|
||||
|
||||
</P>
|
||||
|
||||
<PRE>
|
||||
nl_catd catd = catopen ("catalog_name", 0);
|
||||
</PRE>
|
||||
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
The function takes as the argument the name of the catalog. This usual
|
||||
refers to the name of the program or the package. The second parameter
|
||||
is not further specified in the standard. I don't even know whether it
|
||||
is implemented consistently among various systems. So the common advice
|
||||
is to use <CODE>0</CODE> as the value. The return value is a handle to the
|
||||
message catalog, equivalent to handles to file returned by <CODE>open</CODE>.
|
||||
|
||||
</P>
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
This handle is of course used in the <CODE>catgets</CODE> function which can
|
||||
be used like this:
|
||||
|
||||
</P>
|
||||
|
||||
<PRE>
|
||||
char *translation = catgets (catd, set_no, msg_id, "original string");
|
||||
</PRE>
|
||||
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
The first parameter is this catalog descriptor. The second parameter
|
||||
specifies the set of messages in this catalog, in which the message
|
||||
described by <CODE>msg_id</CODE> is obtained. <CODE>catgets</CODE> therefore uses a
|
||||
three-stage addressing:
|
||||
|
||||
</P>
|
||||
|
||||
<PRE>
|
||||
catalog name => set number => message ID => translation
|
||||
</PRE>
|
||||
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
The fourth argument is not used to address the translation. It is given
|
||||
as a default value in case when one of the addressing stages fail. One
|
||||
important thing to remember is that although the return type of catgets
|
||||
is <CODE>char *</CODE> the resulting string <EM>must not</EM> be changed. It
|
||||
should better <CODE>const char *</CODE>, but the standard is published in
|
||||
1988, one year before ANSI C.
|
||||
|
||||
</P>
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
The last of these function functions is used and behaves as expected:
|
||||
|
||||
</P>
|
||||
|
||||
<PRE>
|
||||
catclose (catd);
|
||||
</PRE>
|
||||
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
After this no <CODE>catgets</CODE> call using the descriptor is legal anymore.
|
||||
|
||||
</P>
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
<H3><A NAME="SEC42" HREF="gettext_toc.html#TOC42">Problems with the <CODE>catgets</CODE> Interface?!</A></H3>
|
||||
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
Now that this descriptions seemed to be really easy where are the
|
||||
problem we speak of. In fact the interface could be used in a
|
||||
reasonable way, but constructing the message catalogs is a pain. The
|
||||
reason for this lies in the third argument of <CODE>catgets</CODE>: the unique
|
||||
message ID. This has to be a numeric value for all messages in a single
|
||||
set. Perhaps you could imagine the problems keeping such list while
|
||||
changing the source code. Add a new message here, remove one there. Of
|
||||
course there have been developed a lot of tools helping to organize this
|
||||
chaos but one as the other fails in one aspect or the other. We don't
|
||||
want to say that the other approach has no problems but they are far
|
||||
more easily to manage.
|
||||
|
||||
</P>
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
<H2><A NAME="SEC43" HREF="gettext_toc.html#TOC43">About <CODE>gettext</CODE></A></H2>
|
||||
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
The definition of the <CODE>gettext</CODE> interface comes from a Uniforum
|
||||
proposal and it is followed by at least one major Unix vendor
|
||||
(Sun) in its last developments. It is not specified in any official
|
||||
standard, though.
|
||||
|
||||
</P>
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
The main points about this solution is that it does not follow the
|
||||
method of normal file handling (open-use-close) and that it does not
|
||||
burden the programmer so many task, especially the unique key handling.
|
||||
Of course here is also a unique key needed, but this key is the
|
||||
message itself (how long or short it is). See section <A HREF="gettext_8.html#SEC48">Comparing the Two Interfaces</A> for a
|
||||
more detailed comparison of the two methods.
|
||||
|
||||
</P>
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
The following section contains a rather detailed description of the
|
||||
interface. We make it that detailed because this is the interface
|
||||
we chose for the GNU <CODE>gettext</CODE> Library. Programmers interested
|
||||
in using this library will be interested in this description.
|
||||
|
||||
</P>
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
<H3><A NAME="SEC44" HREF="gettext_toc.html#TOC44">The Interface</A></H3>
|
||||
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
The minimal functionality an interface must have is a) to select a
|
||||
domain the strings are coming from (a single domain for all programs is
|
||||
not reasonable because its construction and maintenance is difficult,
|
||||
perhaps impossible) and b) to access a string in a selected domain.
|
||||
|
||||
</P>
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
This is principally the description of the <CODE>gettext</CODE> interface. It
|
||||
has an global domain which unqualified usages reference. Of course this
|
||||
domain is selectable by the user.
|
||||
|
||||
</P>
|
||||
|
||||
<PRE>
|
||||
char *textdomain (const char *domain_name);
|
||||
</PRE>
|
||||
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
This provides the possibility to change or query the current status of
|
||||
the current global domain of the <CODE>LC_MESSAGE</CODE> category. The
|
||||
argument is a null-terminated string, whose characters must be legal in
|
||||
the use in filenames. If the <VAR>domain_name</VAR> argument is <CODE>NULL</CODE>,
|
||||
the function return the current value. If no value has been set
|
||||
before, the name of the default domain is returned: <EM>messages</EM>.
|
||||
Please note that although the return value of <CODE>textdomain</CODE> is of
|
||||
type <CODE>char *</CODE> no changing is allowed. It is also important to know
|
||||
that no checks of the availability are made. If the name is not
|
||||
available you will see this by the fact that no translations are provided.
|
||||
|
||||
</P>
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
To use a domain set by <CODE>textdomain</CODE> the function
|
||||
|
||||
</P>
|
||||
|
||||
<PRE>
|
||||
char *gettext (const char *msgid);
|
||||
</PRE>
|
||||
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
is to be used. This is the simplest reasonable form one can imagine.
|
||||
The translation of the string <VAR>msgid</VAR> is returned if it is available
|
||||
in the current domain. If not available the argument itself is
|
||||
returned. If the argument is <CODE>NULL</CODE> the result is undefined.
|
||||
|
||||
</P>
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
One things which should come into mind is that no explicit dependency to
|
||||
the used domain is given. The current value of the domain for the
|
||||
<CODE>LC_MESSAGES</CODE> locale is used. If this changes between two
|
||||
executions of the same <CODE>gettext</CODE> call in the program, both calls
|
||||
reference a different message catalog.
|
||||
|
||||
</P>
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
For the easiest case, which is normally used in internationalized
|
||||
packages, once at the beginning of execution a call to <CODE>textdomain</CODE>
|
||||
is issued, setting the domain to a unique name, normally the package
|
||||
name. In the following code all strings which have to be translated are
|
||||
filtered through the gettext function. That's all, the package speaks
|
||||
your language.
|
||||
|
||||
</P>
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
<H3><A NAME="SEC45" HREF="gettext_toc.html#TOC45">Solving Ambiguities</A></H3>
|
||||
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
While this single name domain work good for most applications there
|
||||
might be the need to get translations from more than one domain. Of
|
||||
course one could switch between different domains with calls to
|
||||
<CODE>textdomain</CODE>, but this is really not convenient nor is it fast. A
|
||||
possible situation could be one case discussing while this writing: all
|
||||
error messages of functions in the set of common used functions should
|
||||
go into a separate domain <CODE>error</CODE>. By this mean we would only need
|
||||
to translate them once.
|
||||
|
||||
</P>
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
For this reasons there are two more functions to retrieve strings:
|
||||
|
||||
</P>
|
||||
|
||||
<PRE>
|
||||
char *dgettext (const char *domain_name, const char *msgid);
|
||||
char *dcgettext (const char *domain_name, const char *msgid,
|
||||
int category);
|
||||
</PRE>
|
||||
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
Both take an additional argument at the first place, which corresponds
|
||||
to the argument of <CODE>textdomain</CODE>. The third argument of
|
||||
<CODE>dcgettext</CODE> allows to use another locale but <CODE>LC_MESSAGES</CODE>.
|
||||
But I really don't know where this can be useful. If the
|
||||
<VAR>domain_name</VAR> is <CODE>NULL</CODE> or <VAR>category</VAR> has an value beside
|
||||
the known ones, the result is undefined. It should also be noted that
|
||||
this function is not part of the second known implementation of this
|
||||
function family, the one found in Solaris.
|
||||
|
||||
</P>
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
A second ambiguity can arise by the fact, that perhaps more than one
|
||||
domain has the same name. This can be solved by specifying where the
|
||||
needed message catalog files can be found.
|
||||
|
||||
</P>
|
||||
|
||||
<PRE>
|
||||
char *bindtextdomain (const char *domain_name,
|
||||
const char *dir_name);
|
||||
</PRE>
|
||||
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
Calling this function binds the given domain to a file in the specified
|
||||
directory (how this file is determined follows below). Especially a
|
||||
file in the systems default place is not favored against the specified
|
||||
file anymore (as it would be by solely using <CODE>textdomain</CODE>). A
|
||||
<CODE>NULL</CODE> pointer for the <VAR>dir_name</VAR> parameter returns the binding
|
||||
associated with <VAR>domain_name</VAR>. If <VAR>domain_name</VAR> itself is
|
||||
<CODE>NULL</CODE> nothing happens and a <CODE>NULL</CODE> pointer is returned. Here
|
||||
again as for all the other functions is true that none of the return
|
||||
value must be changed!
|
||||
|
||||
</P>
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
It is important to remember that relative path names for the
|
||||
<VAR>dir_name</VAR> parameter can be trouble. Since the path is always
|
||||
computed relative to the current directory different results will be
|
||||
achieved when the program executes a <CODE>chdir</CODE> command. Relative
|
||||
paths should always be avoided to avoid dependencies and
|
||||
unreliabilities.
|
||||
|
||||
</P>
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
<H3><A NAME="SEC46" HREF="gettext_toc.html#TOC46">Locating Message Catalog Files</A></H3>
|
||||
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
Because many different languages for many different packages have to be
|
||||
stored we need some way to add these information to file message catalog
|
||||
files. The way usually used in Unix environments is have this encoding
|
||||
in the file name. This is also done here. The directory name given in
|
||||
<CODE>bindtextdomain</CODE>s second argument (or the default directory),
|
||||
followed by the value and name of the locale and the domain name are
|
||||
concatenated:
|
||||
|
||||
</P>
|
||||
|
||||
<PRE>
|
||||
<VAR>dir_name</VAR>/<VAR>locale</VAR>/LC_<VAR>category</VAR>/<VAR>domain_name</VAR>.mo
|
||||
</PRE>
|
||||
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
The default value for <VAR>dir_name</VAR> is system specific. For the GNU
|
||||
library, and for packages adhering to its conventions, it's:
|
||||
|
||||
<PRE>
|
||||
/usr/local/share/locale
|
||||
</PRE>
|
||||
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
<VAR>locale</VAR> is the value of the locale whose name is this
|
||||
<CODE>LC_<VAR>category</VAR></CODE>. For <CODE>gettext</CODE> and <CODE>dgettext</CODE> this
|
||||
locale is always <CODE>LC_MESSAGES</CODE>. <CODE>dcgettext</CODE> specifies the
|
||||
locale by the third argument.<A NAME="DOCF2" HREF="gettext_foot.html#FOOT2">(2)</A> <A NAME="DOCF3" HREF="gettext_foot.html#FOOT3">(3)</A>
|
||||
|
||||
</P>
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
<H3><A NAME="SEC47" HREF="gettext_toc.html#TOC47">Optimization of the *gettext functions</A></H3>
|
||||
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
At this point of the discussion we should talk about an advantage of the
|
||||
GNU <CODE>gettext</CODE> implementation. Some readers might have pointed out
|
||||
that an internationalized program might have a poor performance if some
|
||||
string has to be translated in an inner loop. While this is unavoidable
|
||||
when the string varies from one run of the loop to the other it is
|
||||
simply a waste of time when the string is always the same. Take the
|
||||
following example:
|
||||
|
||||
</P>
|
||||
|
||||
<PRE>
|
||||
{
|
||||
while (...)
|
||||
{
|
||||
puts (gettext ("Hello world"));
|
||||
}
|
||||
}
|
||||
</PRE>
|
||||
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
When the locale selection does not change between two runs the resulting
|
||||
string is always the same. One way to use this is:
|
||||
|
||||
</P>
|
||||
|
||||
<PRE>
|
||||
{
|
||||
str = gettext ("Hello world");
|
||||
while (...)
|
||||
{
|
||||
puts (str);
|
||||
}
|
||||
}
|
||||
</PRE>
|
||||
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
But this solution is not usable in all situation (e.g. when the locale
|
||||
selection changes) nor is it good readable.
|
||||
|
||||
</P>
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
The GNU C compiler, version 2.7 and above, provide another solution for
|
||||
this. To describe this we show here some lines of the
|
||||
<TT>`intl/libgettext.h'</TT> file. For an explanation of the expression
|
||||
command block see section `Statements and Declarations in Expressions' in <CITE>The GNU CC Manual</CITE>.
|
||||
|
||||
</P>
|
||||
|
||||
<PRE>
|
||||
# if defined __GNUC__ && __GNUC__ == 2 && __GNUC_MINOR__ >= 7
|
||||
extern int _nl_msg_cat_cntr;
|
||||
# define dcgettext(domainname, msgid, category) \
|
||||
(__extension__ \
|
||||
({ \
|
||||
char *result; \
|
||||
if (__builtin_constant_p (msgid)) \
|
||||
{ \
|
||||
static char *__translation__; \
|
||||
static int __catalog_counter__; \
|
||||
if (! __translation__ \
|
||||
|| __catalog_counter__ != _nl_msg_cat_cntr) \
|
||||
{ \
|
||||
__translation__ = \
|
||||
dcgettext__ ((domainname), (msgid), (category)); \
|
||||
__catalog_counter__ = _nl_msg_cat_cntr; \
|
||||
} \
|
||||
result = __translation__; \
|
||||
} \
|
||||
else \
|
||||
result = dcgettext__ ((domainname), (msgid), (category)); \
|
||||
result; \
|
||||
}))
|
||||
# endif
|
||||
</PRE>
|
||||
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
The interesting thing here is the <CODE>__builtin_constant_p</CODE> predicate.
|
||||
This is evaluated at compile time and so optimization can take place
|
||||
immediately. Here two cases are distinguished: the argument to
|
||||
<CODE>gettext</CODE> is not a constant value in which case simply the function
|
||||
<CODE>dcgettext__</CODE> is called, the real implementation of the
|
||||
<CODE>dcgettext</CODE> function.
|
||||
|
||||
</P>
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
If the string argument <EM>is</EM> constant we can reuse the once gained
|
||||
translation when the locale selection has not changed. This is exactly
|
||||
what is done here. The <CODE>_nl_msg_cat_cntr</CODE> variable is defined in
|
||||
the <TT>`loadmsgcat.c'</TT> which is available in <TT>`libintl.a'</TT> and is
|
||||
changed whenever a new message catalog is loaded.
|
||||
|
||||
</P>
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
<H2><A NAME="SEC48" HREF="gettext_toc.html#TOC48">Comparing the Two Interfaces</A></H2>
|
||||
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
The following discussion is perhaps a little bit colored. As said
|
||||
above we implemented GNU <CODE>gettext</CODE> following the Uniforum
|
||||
proposal and this surely has its reasons. But it should show how we
|
||||
came to this decision.
|
||||
|
||||
</P>
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
First we take a look at the developing process. When we write an
|
||||
application using NLS provided by <CODE>gettext</CODE> we proceed as always.
|
||||
Only when we come to a string which might be seen by the users and thus
|
||||
has to be translated we use <CODE>gettext("...")</CODE> instead of
|
||||
<CODE>"..."</CODE>. At the beginning of each source file (or in a central
|
||||
header file) we define
|
||||
|
||||
</P>
|
||||
|
||||
<PRE>
|
||||
#define gettext(String) (String)
|
||||
</PRE>
|
||||
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
Even this definition can be avoided when the system supports the
|
||||
<CODE>gettext</CODE> function in its C library. When we compile this code the
|
||||
result is the same as if no NLS code is used. When you take a look at
|
||||
the GNU <CODE>gettext</CODE> code you will see that we use <CODE>_("...")</CODE>
|
||||
instead of <CODE>gettext("...")</CODE>. This reduces the number of
|
||||
additional characters per translatable string to <EM>3</EM> (in words:
|
||||
three).
|
||||
|
||||
</P>
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
When now a production version of the program is needed we simply replace
|
||||
the definition
|
||||
|
||||
</P>
|
||||
|
||||
<PRE>
|
||||
#define _(String) (String)
|
||||
</PRE>
|
||||
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
by
|
||||
|
||||
</P>
|
||||
|
||||
<PRE>
|
||||
#include <libintl.h>
|
||||
#define _(String) gettext (String)
|
||||
</PRE>
|
||||
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
Additionally we run the program <TT>`xgettext'</TT> on all source code file
|
||||
which contain translatable strings and that's it: we have a running
|
||||
program which does not depend on translations to be available, but which
|
||||
can use any that becomes available.
|
||||
|
||||
</P>
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
The same procedure can be done for the <CODE>gettext_noop</CODE> invocations
|
||||
(see section <A HREF="gettext_3.html#SEC18">Special Cases of Translatable Strings</A>). First you can define <CODE>gettext_noop</CODE> to a
|
||||
no-op macro and later use the definition from <TT>`libintl.h'</TT>. Because
|
||||
this name is not used in Suns implementation of <TT>`libintl.h'</TT>,
|
||||
you should consider the following code for your project:
|
||||
|
||||
</P>
|
||||
|
||||
<PRE>
|
||||
#ifdef gettext_noop
|
||||
# define N_(String) gettext_noop (String)
|
||||
#else
|
||||
# define N_(String) (String)
|
||||
#endif
|
||||
</PRE>
|
||||
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
<CODE>N_</CODE> is a short form similar to <CODE>_</CODE>. The <TT>`Makefile'</TT> in
|
||||
the <TT>`po/'</TT> directory of GNU gettext knows by default both of the
|
||||
mentioned short forms so you are invited to follow this proposal for
|
||||
your own ease.
|
||||
|
||||
</P>
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
Now to <CODE>catgets</CODE>. The main problem is the work for the
|
||||
programmer. Every time he comes to a translatable string he has to
|
||||
define a number (or a symbolic constant) which has also be defined in
|
||||
the message catalog file. He also has to take care for duplicate
|
||||
entries, duplicate message IDs etc. If he wants to have the same
|
||||
quality in the message catalog as the GNU <CODE>gettext</CODE> program
|
||||
provides he also has to put the descriptive comments for the strings and
|
||||
the location in all source code files in the message catalog. This is
|
||||
nearly a Mission: Impossible.
|
||||
|
||||
</P>
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
But there are also some points people might call advantages speaking for
|
||||
<CODE>catgets</CODE>. If you have a single word in a string and this string
|
||||
is used in different contexts it is likely that in one or the other
|
||||
language the word has different translations. Example:
|
||||
|
||||
</P>
|
||||
|
||||
<PRE>
|
||||
printf ("%s: %d", gettext ("number"), number_of_errors)
|
||||
|
||||
printf ("you should see %d %s", number_count,
|
||||
number_count == 1 ? gettext ("number") : gettext ("numbers"))
|
||||
</PRE>
|
||||
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
Here we have to translate two times the string <CODE>"number"</CODE>. Even
|
||||
if you do not speak a language beside English it might be possible to
|
||||
recognize that the two words have a different meaning. In German the
|
||||
first appearance has to be translated to <CODE>"Anzahl"</CODE> and the second
|
||||
to <CODE>"Zahl"</CODE>.
|
||||
|
||||
</P>
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
Now you can say that this example is really esoteric. And you are
|
||||
right! This is exactly how we felt about this problem and decide that
|
||||
it does not weight that much. The solution for the above problem could
|
||||
be very easy:
|
||||
|
||||
</P>
|
||||
|
||||
<PRE>
|
||||
printf ("%s %d", gettext ("number:"), number_of_errors)
|
||||
|
||||
printf (number_count == 1 ? gettext ("you should see %d number")
|
||||
: gettext ("you should see %d numbers"),
|
||||
number_count)
|
||||
</PRE>
|
||||
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
We believe that we can solve all conflicts with this method. If it is
|
||||
difficult one can also consider changing one of the conflicting string a
|
||||
little bit. But it is not impossible to overcome.
|
||||
|
||||
</P>
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
Translator note: It is perhaps appropriate here to tell those English
|
||||
speaking programmers that the plural form of a noun cannot be formed by
|
||||
appending a single `s'. Most other languages use different methods.
|
||||
Even the above form is not general enough to cope with all languages.
|
||||
Rafal Maszkowski <rzm@mat.uni.torun.pl> reports:
|
||||
|
||||
</P>
|
||||
|
||||
<BLOCKQUOTE>
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
In Polish we use e.g. plik (file) this way:
|
||||
|
||||
<PRE>
|
||||
1 plik
|
||||
2,3,4 pliki
|
||||
5-21 pliko'w
|
||||
22-24 pliki
|
||||
25-31 pliko'w
|
||||
</PRE>
|
||||
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
and so on (o' means 8859-2 oacute which should be rather okreska,
|
||||
similar to aogonek).
|
||||
</BLOCKQUOTE>
|
||||
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
A workable approach might be to consider methods like the one used for
|
||||
<CODE>LC_TIME</CODE> in the POSIX.2 standard. The value of the
|
||||
<CODE>alt_digits</CODE> field can be up to 100 strings which represent the
|
||||
numbers 1 to 100. Using this in a situation of an internationalized
|
||||
program means that an array of translatable strings should be indexed by
|
||||
the number which should represent. A small example:
|
||||
|
||||
</P>
|
||||
|
||||
<PRE>
|
||||
void
|
||||
print_month_info (int month)
|
||||
{
|
||||
const char *month_pos[12] =
|
||||
{ N_("first"), N_("second"), N_("third"), N_("fourth"),
|
||||
N_("fifth"), N_("sixth"), N_("seventh"), N_("eighth"),
|
||||
N_("ninth"), N_("tenth"), N_("eleventh"), N_("twelfth") };
|
||||
printf (_("%s is the %s month\n"), nl_langinfo (MON_1 + month),
|
||||
_(month_pos[month]));
|
||||
}
|
||||
</PRE>
|
||||
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
It should be obvious that this method is only reasonable for small
|
||||
ranges of numbers.
|
||||
|
||||
</P>
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
<H2><A NAME="SEC49" HREF="gettext_toc.html#TOC49">Using libintl.a in own programs</A></H2>
|
||||
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
Starting with version 0.9.4 the library <CODE>libintl.h</CODE> should be
|
||||
self-contained. I.e., you can use it in your own programs without
|
||||
providing additional functions. The <TT>`Makefile'</TT> will put the header
|
||||
and the library in directories selected using the <CODE>$(prefix)</CODE>.
|
||||
|
||||
</P>
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
One exception of the above is found on HP-UX systems. Here the C library
|
||||
does not contain the <CODE>alloca</CODE> function (and the HP compiler does
|
||||
not generate it inlined). But it is not intended to rewrite the whole
|
||||
library just because of this dumb system. Instead include the
|
||||
<CODE>alloca</CODE> function in all package you use the <CODE>libintl.a</CODE> in.
|
||||
|
||||
</P>
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
<H2><A NAME="SEC50" HREF="gettext_toc.html#TOC50">Being a <CODE>gettext</CODE> grok</A></H2>
|
||||
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
To fully exploit the functionality of the GNU <CODE>gettext</CODE> library it
|
||||
is surely helpful to read the source code. But for those who don't want
|
||||
to spend that much time in reading the (sometimes complicated) code here
|
||||
is a list comments:
|
||||
|
||||
</P>
|
||||
|
||||
<UL>
|
||||
<LI>Changing the language at runtime
|
||||
|
||||
For interactive programs it might be useful to offer a selection of the
|
||||
used language at runtime. To understand how to do this one need to know
|
||||
how the used language is determined while executing the <CODE>gettext</CODE>
|
||||
function. The method which is presented here only works correctly
|
||||
with the GNU implementation of the <CODE>gettext</CODE> functions. It is not
|
||||
possible with underlying <CODE>catgets</CODE> functions or <CODE>gettext</CODE>
|
||||
functions from the systems C library. The exception is of course the
|
||||
GNU C Library which uses the GNU <CODE>gettext</CODE> Library for message handling.
|
||||
|
||||
In the function <CODE>dcgettext</CODE> at every call the current setting of
|
||||
the highest priority environment variable is determined and used.
|
||||
Highest priority means here the following list with decreasing
|
||||
priority:
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
<OL>
|
||||
<LI><CODE>LANGUAGE</CODE>
|
||||
|
||||
<LI><CODE>LC_ALL</CODE>
|
||||
|
||||
<LI><CODE>LC_xxx</CODE>, according to selected locale
|
||||
|
||||
<LI><CODE>LANG</CODE>
|
||||
|
||||
</OL>
|
||||
|
||||
Afterwards the path is constructed using the found value and the
|
||||
translation file is loaded if available.
|
||||
|
||||
What is now when the value for, say, <CODE>LANGUAGE</CODE> changes. According
|
||||
to the process explained above the new value of this variable is found
|
||||
as soon as the <CODE>dcgettext</CODE> function is called. But this also means
|
||||
the (perhaps) different message catalog file is loaded. In other
|
||||
words: the used language is changed.
|
||||
|
||||
But there is one little hook. The code for gcc-2.7.0 and up provides
|
||||
some optimization. This optimization normally prevents the calling of
|
||||
the <CODE>dcgettext</CODE> function as long as no new catalog is loaded. But
|
||||
if <CODE>dcgettext</CODE> is not called the program also cannot find the
|
||||
<CODE>LANGUAGE</CODE> variable be changed (see section <A HREF="gettext_8.html#SEC47">Optimization of the *gettext functions</A>). A
|
||||
solution for this is very easy. Include the following code in the
|
||||
language switching function.
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
<PRE>
|
||||
/* Change language. */
|
||||
setenv ("LANGUAGE", "fr", 1);
|
||||
|
||||
/* Make change known. */
|
||||
{
|
||||
extern int _nl_msg_cat_cntr;
|
||||
++_nl_msg_cat_cntr;
|
||||
}
|
||||
</PRE>
|
||||
|
||||
The variable <CODE>_nl_msg_cat_cntr</CODE> is defined in <TT>`loadmsgcat.c'</TT>.
|
||||
The programmer will find himself in need for a construct like this only
|
||||
when developing programs which do run longer and provide the user to
|
||||
select the language at runtime. Non-interactive programs (like all
|
||||
these little Unix tools) should never need this.
|
||||
|
||||
</UL>
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
<H2><A NAME="SEC51" HREF="gettext_toc.html#TOC51">Temporary Notes for the Programmers Chapter</A></H2>
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
<H3><A NAME="SEC52" HREF="gettext_toc.html#TOC52">Temporary - Two Possible Implementations</A></H3>
|
||||
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
There are two competing methods for language independent messages:
|
||||
the X/Open <CODE>catgets</CODE> method, and the Uniforum <CODE>gettext</CODE>
|
||||
method. The <CODE>catgets</CODE> method indexes messages by integers; the
|
||||
<CODE>gettext</CODE> method indexes them by their English translations.
|
||||
The <CODE>catgets</CODE> method has been around longer and is supported
|
||||
by more vendors. The <CODE>gettext</CODE> method is supported by Sun,
|
||||
and it has been heard that the COSE multi-vendor initiative is
|
||||
supporting it. Neither method is a POSIX standard; the POSIX.1
|
||||
committee had a lot of disagreement in this area.
|
||||
|
||||
</P>
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
Neither one is in the POSIX standard. There was much disagreement
|
||||
in the POSIX.1 committee about using the <CODE>gettext</CODE> routines
|
||||
vs. <CODE>catgets</CODE> (XPG). In the end the committee couldn't
|
||||
agree on anything, so no messaging system was included as part
|
||||
of the standard. I believe the informative annex of the standard
|
||||
includes the XPG3 messaging interfaces, "...as an example of
|
||||
a messaging system that has been implemented..."
|
||||
|
||||
</P>
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
They were very careful not to say anywhere that you should use one
|
||||
set of interfaces over the other. For more on this topic please
|
||||
see the Programming for Internationalization FAQ.
|
||||
|
||||
</P>
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
<H3><A NAME="SEC53" HREF="gettext_toc.html#TOC53">Temporary - About <CODE>catgets</CODE></A></H3>
|
||||
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
There have been a few discussions of late on the use of
|
||||
<CODE>catgets</CODE> as a base. I think it important to present both
|
||||
sides of the argument and hence am opting to play devil's advocate
|
||||
for a little bit.
|
||||
|
||||
</P>
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
I'll not deny the fact that <CODE>catgets</CODE> could have been designed
|
||||
a lot better. It currently has quite a number of limitations and
|
||||
these have already been pointed out.
|
||||
|
||||
</P>
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
However there is a great deal to be said for consistency and
|
||||
standardization. A common recurring problem when writing Unix
|
||||
software is the myriad portability problems across Unix platforms.
|
||||
It seems as if every Unix vendor had a look at the operating system
|
||||
and found parts they could improve upon. Undoubtedly, these
|
||||
modifications are probably innovative and solve real problems.
|
||||
However, software developers have a hard time keeping up with all
|
||||
these changes across so many platforms.
|
||||
|
||||
</P>
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
And this has prompted the Unix vendors to begin to standardize their
|
||||
systems. Hence the impetus for Spec1170. Every major Unix vendor
|
||||
has committed to supporting this standard and every Unix software
|
||||
developer waits with glee the day they can write software to this
|
||||
standard and simply recompile (without having to use autoconf)
|
||||
across different platforms.
|
||||
|
||||
</P>
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
As I understand it, Spec1170 is roughly based upon version 4 of the
|
||||
X/Open Portability Guidelines (XPG4). Because <CODE>catgets</CODE> and
|
||||
friends are defined in XPG4, I'm led to believe that <CODE>catgets</CODE>
|
||||
is a part of Spec1170 and hence will become a standardized component
|
||||
of all Unix systems.
|
||||
|
||||
</P>
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
<H3><A NAME="SEC54" HREF="gettext_toc.html#TOC54">Temporary - Why a single implementation</A></H3>
|
||||
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
Now it seems kind of wasteful to me to have two different systems
|
||||
installed for accessing message catalogs. If we do want to remedy
|
||||
<CODE>catgets</CODE> deficiencies why don't we try to expand <CODE>catgets</CODE>
|
||||
(in a compatible manner) rather than implement an entirely new system.
|
||||
Otherwise, we'll end up with two message catalog access systems installed
|
||||
with an operating system - one set of routines for packages using GNU
|
||||
<CODE>gettext</CODE> for their internationalization, and another set of routines
|
||||
(catgets) for all other software. Bloated?
|
||||
|
||||
</P>
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
Supposing another catalog access system is implemented. Which do
|
||||
we recommend? At least for Linux, we need to attract as many
|
||||
software developers as possible. Hence we need to make it as easy
|
||||
for them to port their software as possible. Which means supporting
|
||||
<CODE>catgets</CODE>. We will be implementing the <CODE>glocale</CODE> code
|
||||
within our <CODE>libc</CODE>, but does this mean we also have to incorporate
|
||||
another message catalog access scheme within our <CODE>libc</CODE> as well?
|
||||
And what about people who are going to be using the <CODE>glocale</CODE>
|
||||
+ non-<CODE>catgets</CODE> routines. When they port their software to
|
||||
other platforms, they're now going to have to include the front-end
|
||||
(<CODE>glocale</CODE>) code plus the back-end code (the non-<CODE>catgets</CODE>
|
||||
access routines) with their software instead of just including the
|
||||
<CODE>glocale</CODE> code with their software.
|
||||
|
||||
</P>
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
Message catalog support is however only the tip of the iceberg.
|
||||
What about the data for the other locale categories. They also have
|
||||
a number of deficiencies. Are we going to abandon them as well and
|
||||
develop another duplicate set of routines (should <CODE>glocale</CODE>
|
||||
expand beyond message catalog support)?
|
||||
|
||||
</P>
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
Like many parts of Unix that can be improved upon, we're stuck with balancing
|
||||
compatibility with the past with useful improvements and innovations for
|
||||
the future.
|
||||
|
||||
</P>
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
<H3><A NAME="SEC55" HREF="gettext_toc.html#TOC55">Temporary - Notes</A></H3>
|
||||
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
X/Open agreed very late on the standard form so that many
|
||||
implementations differ from the final form. Both of my system (old
|
||||
Linux catgets and Ultrix-4) have a strange variation.
|
||||
|
||||
</P>
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
OK. After incorporating the last changes I have to spend some time on
|
||||
making the GNU/Linux <CODE>libc</CODE> <CODE>gettext</CODE> functions. So in future
|
||||
Solaris is not the only system having <CODE>gettext</CODE>.
|
||||
|
||||
</P>
|
||||
<P><HR><P>
|
||||
<p>Go to the <A HREF="gettext_1.html">first</A>, <A HREF="gettext_7.html">previous</A>, <A HREF="gettext_9.html">next</A>, <A HREF="gettext_12.html">last</A> section, <A HREF="gettext_toc.html">table of contents</A>.
|
||||
</BODY>
|
||||
</HTML>
|
@ -1,513 +0,0 @@
|
||||
<HTML>
|
||||
<HEAD>
|
||||
<!-- This HTML file has been created by texi2html 1.54
|
||||
from gettext.texi on 25 January 1999 -->
|
||||
|
||||
<TITLE>GNU gettext utilities - The Translator's View</TITLE>
|
||||
<link href="gettext_10.html" rel=Next>
|
||||
<link href="gettext_8.html" rel=Previous>
|
||||
<link href="gettext_toc.html" rel=ToC>
|
||||
|
||||
</HEAD>
|
||||
<BODY>
|
||||
<p>Go to the <A HREF="gettext_1.html">first</A>, <A HREF="gettext_8.html">previous</A>, <A HREF="gettext_10.html">next</A>, <A HREF="gettext_12.html">last</A> section, <A HREF="gettext_toc.html">table of contents</A>.
|
||||
<P><HR><P>
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
<H1><A NAME="SEC56" HREF="gettext_toc.html#TOC56">The Translator's View</A></H1>
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
<H2><A NAME="SEC57" HREF="gettext_toc.html#TOC57">Introduction 0</A></H2>
|
||||
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
GNU is going international! The Translation Project is a way
|
||||
to get maintainers, translators and users all together, so GNU will
|
||||
gradually become able to speak many native languages.
|
||||
|
||||
</P>
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
The GNU <CODE>gettext</CODE> tool set contains <EM>everything</EM> maintainers
|
||||
need for internationalizing their packages for messages. It also
|
||||
contains quite useful tools for helping translators at localizing
|
||||
messages to their native language, once a package has already been
|
||||
internationalized.
|
||||
|
||||
</P>
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
To achieve the Translation Project, we need many interested
|
||||
people who like their own language and write it well, and who are also
|
||||
able to synergize with other translators speaking the same language.
|
||||
If you'd like to volunteer to <EM>work</EM> at translating messages,
|
||||
please send mail to your translating team.
|
||||
|
||||
</P>
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
Each team has its own mailing list, courtesy of Linux
|
||||
International. You may reach your translating team at the address
|
||||
<TT>`<VAR>ll</VAR>@li.org'</TT>, replacing <VAR>ll</VAR> by the two-letter ISO 639
|
||||
code for your language. Language codes are <EM>not</EM> the same as
|
||||
country codes given in ISO 3166. The following translating teams
|
||||
exist:
|
||||
|
||||
</P>
|
||||
|
||||
<BLOCKQUOTE>
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
Chinese <CODE>zh</CODE>, Czech <CODE>cs</CODE>, Danish <CODE>da</CODE>, Dutch <CODE>nl</CODE>,
|
||||
Esperanto <CODE>eo</CODE>, Finnish <CODE>fi</CODE>, French <CODE>fr</CODE>, Irish
|
||||
<CODE>ga</CODE>, German <CODE>de</CODE>, Greek <CODE>el</CODE>, Italian <CODE>it</CODE>,
|
||||
Japanese <CODE>ja</CODE>, Indonesian <CODE>in</CODE>, Norwegian <CODE>no</CODE>, Polish
|
||||
<CODE>pl</CODE>, Portuguese <CODE>pt</CODE>, Russian <CODE>ru</CODE>, Spanish <CODE>es</CODE>,
|
||||
Swedish <CODE>sv</CODE> and Turkish <CODE>tr</CODE>.
|
||||
</BLOCKQUOTE>
|
||||
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
For example, you may reach the Chinese translating team by writing to
|
||||
<TT>`zh@li.org'</TT>. When you become a member of the translating team
|
||||
for your own language, you may subscribe to its list. For example,
|
||||
Swedish people can send a message to <TT>`sv-request@li.org'</TT>,
|
||||
having this message body:
|
||||
|
||||
</P>
|
||||
|
||||
<PRE>
|
||||
subscribe
|
||||
</PRE>
|
||||
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
Keep in mind that team members should be interested in <EM>working</EM>
|
||||
at translations, or at solving translational difficulties, rather than
|
||||
merely lurking around. If your team does not exist yet and you want to
|
||||
start one, please write to <TT>`gnu-translation@prep.ai.mit.edu'</TT>;
|
||||
you will then reach the GNU coordinator for all translator teams.
|
||||
|
||||
</P>
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
A handful of GNU packages have already been adapted and provided
|
||||
with message translations for several languages. Translation
|
||||
teams have begun to organize, using these packages as a starting
|
||||
point. But there are many more packages and many languages for
|
||||
which we have no volunteer translators. If you would like to
|
||||
volunteer to work at translating messages, please send mail to
|
||||
<TT>`gnu-translation@prep.ai.mit.edu'</TT> indicating what language(s)
|
||||
you can work on.
|
||||
|
||||
</P>
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
<H2><A NAME="SEC58" HREF="gettext_toc.html#TOC58">Introduction 1</A></H2>
|
||||
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
This is now official, GNU is going international! Here is the
|
||||
announcement submitted for the January 1995 GNU Bulletin:
|
||||
|
||||
</P>
|
||||
|
||||
<BLOCKQUOTE>
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
A handful of GNU packages have already been adapted and provided
|
||||
with message translations for several languages. Translation
|
||||
teams have begun to organize, using these packages as a starting
|
||||
point. But there are many more packages and many languages
|
||||
for which we have no volunteer translators. If you'd like to
|
||||
volunteer to work at translating messages, please send mail to
|
||||
<SAMP>`gnu-translation@prep.ai.mit.edu'</SAMP> indicating what language(s)
|
||||
you can work on.
|
||||
</BLOCKQUOTE>
|
||||
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
This document should answer many questions for those who are curious
|
||||
about the process or would like to contribute. Please at least skim
|
||||
over it, hoping to cut down a little of the high volume of e-mail
|
||||
generated by this collective effort towards GNU internationalization.
|
||||
|
||||
</P>
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
Most free programming which is widely shared is done in English, and
|
||||
currently, English is used as the main communicating language between
|
||||
national communities collaborating to the GNU project. This very document
|
||||
is written in English. This will not change in the foreseeable future.
|
||||
|
||||
</P>
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
However, there is a strong appetite from national communities for
|
||||
having more software able to write using national language and habits,
|
||||
and there is an on-going effort to modify GNU software in such a way
|
||||
that it becomes able to do so. The experiments driven so far raised
|
||||
an enthusiastic response from pretesters, so we believe that GNU
|
||||
internationalization is dedicated to succeed.
|
||||
|
||||
</P>
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
For suggestion clarifications, additions or corrections to this
|
||||
document, please e-mail to <TT>`gnu-translation@prep.ai.mit.edu'</TT>.
|
||||
|
||||
</P>
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
<H2><A NAME="SEC59" HREF="gettext_toc.html#TOC59">Discussions</A></H2>
|
||||
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
Facing this internationalization effort, a few users expressed their
|
||||
concerns. Some of these doubts are presented and discussed, here.
|
||||
|
||||
</P>
|
||||
|
||||
<UL>
|
||||
<LI>Smaller groups
|
||||
|
||||
Some languages are not spoken by a very large number of people, so people
|
||||
speaking them sometimes consider that there may not be all that much
|
||||
demand such versions of free software packages. Moreover, many people
|
||||
being <EM>into computers</EM>, in some countries, generally seem to prefer
|
||||
English versions of their software.
|
||||
|
||||
On the other end, people might enjoy their own language a lot, and be
|
||||
very motivated at providing to themselves the pleasure of having their
|
||||
beloved free software speaking their mother tongue. They do themselves
|
||||
a personal favor, and do not pay that much attention to the number of
|
||||
people benefiting of their work.
|
||||
|
||||
<LI>Misinterpretation
|
||||
|
||||
Other users are shy to push forward their own language, seeing in this
|
||||
some kind of misplaced propaganda. Someone thought there must be some
|
||||
users of the language over the networks pestering other people with it.
|
||||
|
||||
But any spoken language is worth localization, because there are
|
||||
people behind the language for whom the language is important and
|
||||
dear to their hearts.
|
||||
|
||||
<LI>Odd translations
|
||||
|
||||
The biggest problem is to find the right translations so that
|
||||
everybody can understand the messages. Translations are usually a
|
||||
little odd. Some people get used to English, to the extent they may
|
||||
find translations into their own language "rather pushy, obnoxious
|
||||
and sometimes even hilarious." As a French speaking man, I have
|
||||
the experience of those instruction manuals for goods, so poorly
|
||||
translated in French in Korea or Taiwan...
|
||||
|
||||
The fact is that we sometimes have to create a kind of national
|
||||
computer culture, and this is not easy without the collaboration of
|
||||
many people liking their mother tongue. This is why translations are
|
||||
better achieved by people knowing and loving their own language, and
|
||||
ready to work together at improving the results they obtain.
|
||||
|
||||
<LI>Dependencies over the GPL
|
||||
|
||||
Some people wonder if using GNU <CODE>gettext</CODE> necessarily brings their package
|
||||
under the protective wing of the GNU General Public License, when they
|
||||
do not want to make their program free, or want other kinds of freedom.
|
||||
The simplest answer is yes.
|
||||
|
||||
The mere marking of localizable strings in a package, or conditional
|
||||
inclusion of a few lines for initialization, is not really including
|
||||
GPL'ed code. However, the localization routines themselves are under
|
||||
the GPL and would bring the remainder of the package under the GPL
|
||||
if they were distributed with it. So, I presume that, for those
|
||||
for which this is a problem, it could be circumvented by letting to
|
||||
the end installers the burden of assembling a package prepared for
|
||||
localization, but not providing the localization routines themselves.
|
||||
|
||||
</UL>
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
<H2><A NAME="SEC60" HREF="gettext_toc.html#TOC60">Organization</A></H2>
|
||||
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
On a larger scale, the true solution would be to organize some kind of
|
||||
fairly precise set up in which volunteers could participate. I gave
|
||||
some thought to this idea lately, and realize there will be some
|
||||
touchy points. I thought of writing to Richard Stallman to launch
|
||||
such a project, but feel it might be good to shake out the ideas
|
||||
between ourselves first. Most probably that Linux International has
|
||||
some experience in the field already, or would like to orchestrate
|
||||
the volunteer work, maybe. Food for thought, in any case!
|
||||
|
||||
</P>
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
I guess we have to setup something early, somehow, that will help
|
||||
many possible contributors of the same language to interlock and avoid
|
||||
work duplication, and further be put in contact for solving together
|
||||
problems particular to their tongue (in most languages, there are many
|
||||
difficulties peculiar to translating technical English). My Swedish
|
||||
contributor acknowledged these difficulties, and I'm well aware of
|
||||
them for French.
|
||||
|
||||
</P>
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
This is surely not a technical issue, but we should manage so the
|
||||
effort of locale contributors be maximally useful, despite the national
|
||||
team layer interface between contributors and maintainers.
|
||||
|
||||
</P>
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
The Translation Project needs some setup for coordinating language
|
||||
coordinators. Localizing evolving programs will surely
|
||||
become a permanent and continuous activity in the free software community,
|
||||
once well started.
|
||||
The setup should be minimally completed and tested before GNU
|
||||
<CODE>gettext</CODE> becomes an official reality. The e-mail address
|
||||
<TT>`translation@iro.umontreal.ca'</TT> has been setup for receiving
|
||||
offers from volunteers and general e-mail on these topics. This address
|
||||
reaches the Translation Project coordinator.
|
||||
|
||||
</P>
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
<H3><A NAME="SEC61" HREF="gettext_toc.html#TOC61">Central Coordination</A></H3>
|
||||
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
I also think GNU will need sooner than it thinks, that someone setup
|
||||
a way to organize and coordinate these groups. Some kind of group
|
||||
of groups. My opinion is that it would be good that GNU delegates
|
||||
this task to a small group of collaborating volunteers, shortly.
|
||||
Perhaps in <TT>`gnu.announce'</TT> a list of this national committee's
|
||||
can be published.
|
||||
|
||||
</P>
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
My role as coordinator would simply be to refer to Ulrich any German
|
||||
speaking volunteer interested to localization of free software packages, and
|
||||
maybe helping national groups to initially organize, while maintaining
|
||||
national registries for until national groups are ready to take over.
|
||||
In fact, the coordinator should ease volunteers to get in contact with
|
||||
one another for creating national teams, which should then select
|
||||
one coordinator per language, or country (regionalized language).
|
||||
If well done, the coordination should be useful without being an
|
||||
overwhelming task, the time to put delegations in place.
|
||||
|
||||
</P>
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
<H3><A NAME="SEC62" HREF="gettext_toc.html#TOC62">National Teams</A></H3>
|
||||
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
I suggest we look for volunteer coordinators/editors for individual
|
||||
languages. These people will scan contributions of translation files
|
||||
for various programs, for their own languages, and will ensure high
|
||||
and uniform standards of diction.
|
||||
|
||||
</P>
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
From my current experience with other people in these days, those who
|
||||
provide localizations are very enthusiastic about the process, and are
|
||||
more interested in the localization process than in the program they
|
||||
localize, and want to do many programs, not just one. This seems
|
||||
to confirm that having a coordinator/editor for each language is a
|
||||
good idea.
|
||||
|
||||
</P>
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
We need to choose someone who is good at writing clear and concise
|
||||
prose in the language in question. That is hard--we can't check
|
||||
it ourselves. So we need to ask a few people to judge each others'
|
||||
writing and select the one who is best.
|
||||
|
||||
</P>
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
I announce my prerelease to a few dozen people, and you would not
|
||||
believe all the discussions it generated already. I shudder to think
|
||||
what will happen when this will be launched, for true, officially,
|
||||
world wide. Who am I to arbitrate between two Czekolsovak users
|
||||
contradicting each other, for example?
|
||||
|
||||
</P>
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
I assume that your German is not much better than my French so that
|
||||
I would not be able to judge about these formulations. What I would
|
||||
suggest is that for each language there is a group for people who
|
||||
maintain the PO files and judge about changes. I suspect there will
|
||||
be cultural differences between how such groups of people will behave.
|
||||
Some will have relaxed ways, reach consensus easily, and have anyone
|
||||
of the group relate to the maintainers, while others will fight to
|
||||
death, organize heavy administrations up to national standards, and
|
||||
use strict channels.
|
||||
|
||||
</P>
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
The German team is putting out a good example. Right now, they are
|
||||
maybe half a dozen people revising translations of each other and
|
||||
discussing the linguistic issues. I do not even have all the names.
|
||||
Ulrich Drepper is taking care of coordinating the German team.
|
||||
He subscribed to all my pretest lists, so I do not even have to warn
|
||||
him specifically of incoming releases.
|
||||
|
||||
</P>
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
I'm sure, that is a good idea to get teams for each language working
|
||||
on translations. That will make the translations better and more
|
||||
consistent.
|
||||
|
||||
</P>
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
<H4><A NAME="SEC63" HREF="gettext_toc.html#TOC63">Sub-Cultures</A></H4>
|
||||
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
Taking French for example, there are a few sub-cultures around computers
|
||||
which developed diverging vocabularies. Picking volunteers here and
|
||||
there without addressing this problem in an organized way, soon in the
|
||||
project, might produce a distasteful mix of internationalized programs,
|
||||
and possibly trigger endless quarrels among those who really care.
|
||||
|
||||
</P>
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
Keeping some kind of unity in the way French localization of
|
||||
internationalized programs is achieved is a difficult (and delicate) job.
|
||||
Knowing the latin character of French people (:-), if we take this
|
||||
the wrong way, we could end up nowhere, or spoil a lot of energies.
|
||||
Maybe we should begin to address this problem seriously <EM>before</EM>
|
||||
GNU <CODE>gettext</CODE> become officially published. And I suspect that this
|
||||
means soon!
|
||||
|
||||
</P>
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
<H4><A NAME="SEC64" HREF="gettext_toc.html#TOC64">Organizational Ideas</A></H4>
|
||||
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
I expect the next big changes after the official release. Please note
|
||||
that I use the German translation of the short GPL message. We need
|
||||
to set a few good examples before the localization goes out for true
|
||||
in the free software community. Here are a few points to discuss:
|
||||
|
||||
</P>
|
||||
|
||||
<UL>
|
||||
<LI>
|
||||
|
||||
Each group should have one FTP server (at least one master).
|
||||
|
||||
<LI>
|
||||
|
||||
The files on the server should reflect the latest version (of
|
||||
course!) and it should also contain a RCS directory with the
|
||||
corresponding archives (I don't have this now).
|
||||
|
||||
<LI>
|
||||
|
||||
There should also be a ChangeLog file (this is more useful than the
|
||||
RCS archive but can be generated automatically from the later by
|
||||
Emacs).
|
||||
|
||||
<LI>
|
||||
|
||||
A <STRONG>core group</STRONG> should judge about questionable changes (for now
|
||||
this group consists solely by me but I ask some others occasionally;
|
||||
this also seems to work).
|
||||
|
||||
</UL>
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
<H3><A NAME="SEC65" HREF="gettext_toc.html#TOC65">Mailing Lists</A></H3>
|
||||
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
If we get any inquiries about GNU <CODE>gettext</CODE>, send them on to:
|
||||
|
||||
</P>
|
||||
|
||||
<PRE>
|
||||
<TT>`translation@iro.umontreal.ca'</TT>
|
||||
</PRE>
|
||||
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
The <TT>`*-pretest'</TT> lists are quite useful to me, maybe the idea could
|
||||
be generalized to many GNU, and non-GNU packages. But each maintainer
|
||||
his/her way!
|
||||
|
||||
</P>
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
Fran@,{c}ois, we have a mechanism in place here at
|
||||
<TT>`gnu.ai.mit.edu'</TT> to track teams, support mailing lists for
|
||||
them and log members. We have a slight preference that you use it.
|
||||
If this is OK with you, I can get you clued in.
|
||||
|
||||
</P>
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
Things are changing! A few years ago, when Daniel Fekete and I
|
||||
asked for a mailing list for GNU localization, nested at the FSF, we
|
||||
were politely invited to organize it anywhere else, and so did we.
|
||||
For communicating with my pretesters, I later made a handful of
|
||||
mailing lists located at iro.umontreal.ca and administrated by
|
||||
<CODE>majordomo</CODE>. These lists have been <EM>very</EM> dependable
|
||||
so far...
|
||||
|
||||
</P>
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
I suspect that the German team will organize itself a mailing list
|
||||
located in Germany, and so forth for other countries. But before they
|
||||
organize for true, it could surely be useful to offer mailing lists
|
||||
located at the FSF to each national team. So yes, please explain me
|
||||
how I should proceed to create and handle them.
|
||||
|
||||
</P>
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
We should create temporary mailing lists, one per country, to help
|
||||
people organize. Temporary, because once regrouped and structured, it
|
||||
would be fair the volunteers from country bring back <EM>their</EM> list
|
||||
in there and manage it as they want. My feeling is that, in the long
|
||||
run, each team should run its own list, from within their country.
|
||||
There also should be some central list to which all teams could
|
||||
subscribe as they see fit, as long as each team is represented in it.
|
||||
|
||||
</P>
|
||||
|
||||
|
||||
<H2><A NAME="SEC66" HREF="gettext_toc.html#TOC66">Information Flow</A></H2>
|
||||
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
There will surely be some discussion about this messages after the
|
||||
packages are finally released. If people now send you some proposals
|
||||
for better messages, how do you proceed? Jim, please note that
|
||||
right now, as I put forward nearly a dozen of localizable programs, I
|
||||
receive both the translations and the coordination concerns about them.
|
||||
|
||||
</P>
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
If I put one of my things to pretest, Ulrich receives the announcement
|
||||
and passes it on to the German team, who make last minute revisions.
|
||||
Then he submits the translation files to me <EM>as the maintainer</EM>.
|
||||
For free packages I do not maintain, I would not even hear about it.
|
||||
This scheme could be made to work for the whole Translation Project,
|
||||
I think. For security reasons, maybe Ulrich (national coordinators,
|
||||
in fact) should update central registry kept at the Translation Project
|
||||
(Jim, me, or Len's recruits) once in a while.
|
||||
|
||||
</P>
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
In December/January, I was aggressively ready to internationalize
|
||||
all of GNU, giving myself the duty of one small GNU package per week
|
||||
or so, taking many weeks or months for bigger packages. But it does
|
||||
not work this way. I first did all the things I'm responsible for.
|
||||
I've nothing against some missionary work on other maintainers, but
|
||||
I'm also loosing a lot of energy over it--same debates over again.
|
||||
|
||||
</P>
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
And when the first localized packages are released we'll get a lot of
|
||||
responses about ugly translations :-). Surely, and we need to have
|
||||
beforehand a fairly good idea about how to handle the information
|
||||
flow between the national teams and the package maintainers.
|
||||
|
||||
</P>
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
Please start saving somewhere a quick history of each PO file. I know
|
||||
for sure that the file format will change, allowing for comments.
|
||||
It would be nice that each file has a kind of log, and references for
|
||||
those who want to submit comments or gripes, or otherwise contribute.
|
||||
I sent a proposal for a fast and flexible format, but it is not
|
||||
receiving acceptance yet by the GNU deciders. I'll tell you when I
|
||||
have more information about this.
|
||||
|
||||
</P>
|
||||
<P><HR><P>
|
||||
<p>Go to the <A HREF="gettext_1.html">first</A>, <A HREF="gettext_8.html">previous</A>, <A HREF="gettext_10.html">next</A>, <A HREF="gettext_12.html">last</A> section, <A HREF="gettext_toc.html">table of contents</A>.
|
||||
</BODY>
|
||||
</HTML>
|
@ -1,35 +0,0 @@
|
||||
<HTML>
|
||||
<HEAD>
|
||||
<!-- This HTML file has been created by texi2html 1.54
|
||||
from gettext.texi on 25 January 1999 -->
|
||||
|
||||
<TITLE>GNU gettext utilities - Footnotes</TITLE>
|
||||
|
||||
</HEAD>
|
||||
<BODY>
|
||||
<H1>GNU gettext tools, version 0.10.35</H1>
|
||||
<H2>Native Language Support Library and Tools</H2>
|
||||
<H2>Edition 0.10.35, 1 May 1998</H2>
|
||||
<ADDRESS>Ulrich Drepper</ADDRESS>
|
||||
<ADDRESS>Jim Meyering</ADDRESS>
|
||||
<ADDRESS>Fran@,{c}ois Pinard</ADDRESS>
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
<P><HR><P>
|
||||
<H3><A NAME="FOOT1" HREF="gettext_2.html#DOCF1">(1)</A></H3>
|
||||
<P>This
|
||||
limitation is not imposed by GNU <CODE>gettext</CODE>, but comes from the
|
||||
<CODE>msgfmt</CODE> implementation on Solaris.
|
||||
<H3><A NAME="FOOT2" HREF="gettext_8.html#DOCF2">(2)</A></H3>
|
||||
<P>Some
|
||||
system, eg Ultrix, don't have <CODE>LC_MESSAGES</CODE>. Here we use a more or
|
||||
less arbitrary value for it.
|
||||
<H3><A NAME="FOOT3" HREF="gettext_8.html#DOCF3">(3)</A></H3>
|
||||
<P>When the system does not support
|
||||
<CODE>setlocale</CODE> its behavior in setting the locale values is simulated
|
||||
by looking at the environment variables.
|
||||
<P><HR><P>
|
||||
This document was generated on 25 January 1999 using the
|
||||
<A HREF="http://wwwcn.cern.ch/dci/texi2html/">texi2html</A>
|
||||
translator version 1.51a.</P>
|
||||
</BODY>
|
||||
</HTML>
|
@ -1,143 +0,0 @@
|
||||
<HTML>
|
||||
<HEAD>
|
||||
<!-- This HTML file has been created by texi2html 1.54
|
||||
from gettext.texi on 25 January 1999 -->
|
||||
|
||||
<TITLE>GNU gettext utilities - Table of Contents</TITLE>
|
||||
|
||||
</HEAD>
|
||||
<BODY>
|
||||
<H1>GNU gettext tools, version 0.10.35</H1>
|
||||
<H2>Native Language Support Library and Tools</H2>
|
||||
<H2>Edition 0.10.35, 1 May 1998</H2>
|
||||
<ADDRESS>Ulrich Drepper</ADDRESS>
|
||||
<ADDRESS>Jim Meyering</ADDRESS>
|
||||
<ADDRESS>Fran@,{c}ois Pinard</ADDRESS>
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
<P><HR><P>
|
||||
|
||||
</P>
|
||||
|
||||
<UL>
|
||||
<LI><A NAME="TOC1" HREF="gettext_1.html#SEC1">Introduction</A>
|
||||
<UL>
|
||||
<LI><A NAME="TOC2" HREF="gettext_1.html#SEC2">The Purpose of GNU <CODE>gettext</CODE></A>
|
||||
<LI><A NAME="TOC3" HREF="gettext_1.html#SEC3">I18n, L10n, and Such</A>
|
||||
<LI><A NAME="TOC4" HREF="gettext_1.html#SEC4">Aspects in Native Language Support</A>
|
||||
<LI><A NAME="TOC5" HREF="gettext_1.html#SEC5">Files Conveying Translations</A>
|
||||
<LI><A NAME="TOC6" HREF="gettext_1.html#SEC6">Overview of GNU <CODE>gettext</CODE></A>
|
||||
</UL>
|
||||
<LI><A NAME="TOC7" HREF="gettext_2.html#SEC7">PO Files and PO Mode Basics</A>
|
||||
<UL>
|
||||
<LI><A NAME="TOC8" HREF="gettext_2.html#SEC8">Completing GNU <CODE>gettext</CODE> Installation</A>
|
||||
<LI><A NAME="TOC9" HREF="gettext_2.html#SEC9">The Format of PO Files</A>
|
||||
<LI><A NAME="TOC10" HREF="gettext_2.html#SEC10">Main PO mode Commands</A>
|
||||
<LI><A NAME="TOC11" HREF="gettext_2.html#SEC11">Entry Positioning</A>
|
||||
<LI><A NAME="TOC12" HREF="gettext_2.html#SEC12">Normalizing Strings in Entries</A>
|
||||
</UL>
|
||||
<LI><A NAME="TOC13" HREF="gettext_3.html#SEC13">Preparing Program Sources</A>
|
||||
<UL>
|
||||
<LI><A NAME="TOC14" HREF="gettext_3.html#SEC14">Triggering <CODE>gettext</CODE> Operations</A>
|
||||
<LI><A NAME="TOC15" HREF="gettext_3.html#SEC15">How Marks Appears in Sources</A>
|
||||
<LI><A NAME="TOC16" HREF="gettext_3.html#SEC16">Marking Translatable Strings</A>
|
||||
<LI><A NAME="TOC17" HREF="gettext_3.html#SEC17">Special Comments preceding Keywords</A>
|
||||
<LI><A NAME="TOC18" HREF="gettext_3.html#SEC18">Special Cases of Translatable Strings</A>
|
||||
</UL>
|
||||
<LI><A NAME="TOC19" HREF="gettext_4.html#SEC19">Making the Initial PO File</A>
|
||||
<UL>
|
||||
<LI><A NAME="TOC20" HREF="gettext_4.html#SEC20">Invoking the <CODE>xgettext</CODE> Program</A>
|
||||
<LI><A NAME="TOC21" HREF="gettext_4.html#SEC21">C Sources Context</A>
|
||||
<LI><A NAME="TOC22" HREF="gettext_4.html#SEC22">Using Translation Compendiums</A>
|
||||
</UL>
|
||||
<LI><A NAME="TOC23" HREF="gettext_5.html#SEC23">Updating Existing PO Files</A>
|
||||
<UL>
|
||||
<LI><A NAME="TOC24" HREF="gettext_5.html#SEC24">Invoking the <CODE>msgmerge</CODE> Program</A>
|
||||
<LI><A NAME="TOC25" HREF="gettext_5.html#SEC25">Translated Entries</A>
|
||||
<LI><A NAME="TOC26" HREF="gettext_5.html#SEC26">Fuzzy Entries</A>
|
||||
<LI><A NAME="TOC27" HREF="gettext_5.html#SEC27">Untranslated Entries</A>
|
||||
<LI><A NAME="TOC28" HREF="gettext_5.html#SEC28">Obsolete Entries</A>
|
||||
<LI><A NAME="TOC29" HREF="gettext_5.html#SEC29">Modifying Translations</A>
|
||||
<LI><A NAME="TOC30" HREF="gettext_5.html#SEC30">Modifying Comments</A>
|
||||
<LI><A NAME="TOC31" HREF="gettext_5.html#SEC31">Consulting Auxiliary PO Files</A>
|
||||
</UL>
|
||||
<LI><A NAME="TOC32" HREF="gettext_6.html#SEC32">Producing Binary MO Files</A>
|
||||
<UL>
|
||||
<LI><A NAME="TOC33" HREF="gettext_6.html#SEC33">Invoking the <CODE>msgfmt</CODE> Program</A>
|
||||
<LI><A NAME="TOC34" HREF="gettext_6.html#SEC34">The Format of GNU MO Files</A>
|
||||
</UL>
|
||||
<LI><A NAME="TOC35" HREF="gettext_7.html#SEC35">The User's View</A>
|
||||
<UL>
|
||||
<LI><A NAME="TOC36" HREF="gettext_7.html#SEC36">The Current <TT>`ABOUT-NLS'</TT> Matrix</A>
|
||||
<LI><A NAME="TOC37" HREF="gettext_7.html#SEC37">Magic for Installers</A>
|
||||
<LI><A NAME="TOC38" HREF="gettext_7.html#SEC38">Magic for End Users</A>
|
||||
</UL>
|
||||
<LI><A NAME="TOC39" HREF="gettext_8.html#SEC39">The Programmer's View</A>
|
||||
<UL>
|
||||
<LI><A NAME="TOC40" HREF="gettext_8.html#SEC40">About <CODE>catgets</CODE></A>
|
||||
<UL>
|
||||
<LI><A NAME="TOC41" HREF="gettext_8.html#SEC41">The Interface</A>
|
||||
<LI><A NAME="TOC42" HREF="gettext_8.html#SEC42">Problems with the <CODE>catgets</CODE> Interface?!</A>
|
||||
</UL>
|
||||
<LI><A NAME="TOC43" HREF="gettext_8.html#SEC43">About <CODE>gettext</CODE></A>
|
||||
<UL>
|
||||
<LI><A NAME="TOC44" HREF="gettext_8.html#SEC44">The Interface</A>
|
||||
<LI><A NAME="TOC45" HREF="gettext_8.html#SEC45">Solving Ambiguities</A>
|
||||
<LI><A NAME="TOC46" HREF="gettext_8.html#SEC46">Locating Message Catalog Files</A>
|
||||
<LI><A NAME="TOC47" HREF="gettext_8.html#SEC47">Optimization of the *gettext functions</A>
|
||||
</UL>
|
||||
<LI><A NAME="TOC48" HREF="gettext_8.html#SEC48">Comparing the Two Interfaces</A>
|
||||
<LI><A NAME="TOC49" HREF="gettext_8.html#SEC49">Using libintl.a in own programs</A>
|
||||
<LI><A NAME="TOC50" HREF="gettext_8.html#SEC50">Being a <CODE>gettext</CODE> grok</A>
|
||||
<LI><A NAME="TOC51" HREF="gettext_8.html#SEC51">Temporary Notes for the Programmers Chapter</A>
|
||||
<UL>
|
||||
<LI><A NAME="TOC52" HREF="gettext_8.html#SEC52">Temporary - Two Possible Implementations</A>
|
||||
<LI><A NAME="TOC53" HREF="gettext_8.html#SEC53">Temporary - About <CODE>catgets</CODE></A>
|
||||
<LI><A NAME="TOC54" HREF="gettext_8.html#SEC54">Temporary - Why a single implementation</A>
|
||||
<LI><A NAME="TOC55" HREF="gettext_8.html#SEC55">Temporary - Notes</A>
|
||||
</UL>
|
||||
</UL>
|
||||
<LI><A NAME="TOC56" HREF="gettext_9.html#SEC56">The Translator's View</A>
|
||||
<UL>
|
||||
<LI><A NAME="TOC57" HREF="gettext_9.html#SEC57">Introduction 0</A>
|
||||
<LI><A NAME="TOC58" HREF="gettext_9.html#SEC58">Introduction 1</A>
|
||||
<LI><A NAME="TOC59" HREF="gettext_9.html#SEC59">Discussions</A>
|
||||
<LI><A NAME="TOC60" HREF="gettext_9.html#SEC60">Organization</A>
|
||||
<UL>
|
||||
<LI><A NAME="TOC61" HREF="gettext_9.html#SEC61">Central Coordination</A>
|
||||
<LI><A NAME="TOC62" HREF="gettext_9.html#SEC62">National Teams</A>
|
||||
<UL>
|
||||
<LI><A NAME="TOC63" HREF="gettext_9.html#SEC63">Sub-Cultures</A>
|
||||
<LI><A NAME="TOC64" HREF="gettext_9.html#SEC64">Organizational Ideas</A>
|
||||
</UL>
|
||||
<LI><A NAME="TOC65" HREF="gettext_9.html#SEC65">Mailing Lists</A>
|
||||
</UL>
|
||||
<LI><A NAME="TOC66" HREF="gettext_9.html#SEC66">Information Flow</A>
|
||||
</UL>
|
||||
<LI><A NAME="TOC67" HREF="gettext_10.html#SEC67">The Maintainer's View</A>
|
||||
<UL>
|
||||
<LI><A NAME="TOC68" HREF="gettext_10.html#SEC68">Flat or Non-Flat Directory Structures</A>
|
||||
<LI><A NAME="TOC69" HREF="gettext_10.html#SEC69">Prerequisite Works</A>
|
||||
<LI><A NAME="TOC70" HREF="gettext_10.html#SEC70">Invoking the <CODE>gettextize</CODE> Program</A>
|
||||
<LI><A NAME="TOC71" HREF="gettext_10.html#SEC71">Files You Must Create or Alter</A>
|
||||
<UL>
|
||||
<LI><A NAME="TOC72" HREF="gettext_10.html#SEC72"><TT>`POTFILES.in'</TT> in <TT>`po/'</TT></A>
|
||||
<LI><A NAME="TOC73" HREF="gettext_10.html#SEC73"><TT>`configure.in'</TT> at top level</A>
|
||||
<LI><A NAME="TOC74" HREF="gettext_10.html#SEC74"><TT>`aclocal.m4'</TT> at top level</A>
|
||||
<LI><A NAME="TOC75" HREF="gettext_10.html#SEC75"><TT>`acconfig.h'</TT> at top level</A>
|
||||
<LI><A NAME="TOC76" HREF="gettext_10.html#SEC76"><TT>`Makefile.in'</TT> at top level</A>
|
||||
<LI><A NAME="TOC77" HREF="gettext_10.html#SEC77"><TT>`Makefile.in'</TT> in <TT>`src/'</TT></A>
|
||||
</UL>
|
||||
</UL>
|
||||
<LI><A NAME="TOC78" HREF="gettext_11.html#SEC78">Concluding Remarks</A>
|
||||
<UL>
|
||||
<LI><A NAME="TOC79" HREF="gettext_11.html#SEC79">History of GNU <CODE>gettext</CODE></A>
|
||||
<LI><A NAME="TOC80" HREF="gettext_11.html#SEC80">Related Readings</A>
|
||||
</UL>
|
||||
<LI><A NAME="TOC81" HREF="gettext_12.html#SEC81">Country Codes</A>
|
||||
</UL>
|
||||
<P><HR><P>
|
||||
This document was generated on 25 January 1999 using the
|
||||
<A HREF="http://wwwcn.cern.ch/dci/texi2html/">texi2html</A>
|
||||
translator version 1.51a.</P>
|
||||
</BODY>
|
||||
</HTML>
|
@ -1,143 +0,0 @@
|
||||
<HTML>
|
||||
<HEAD>
|
||||
<!-- This HTML file has been created by texi2html 1.54
|
||||
from gettext.texi on 25 January 1999 -->
|
||||
|
||||
<TITLE>GNU gettext utilities - Table of Contents</TITLE>
|
||||
|
||||
</HEAD>
|
||||
<BODY>
|
||||
<H1>GNU gettext tools, version 0.10.35</H1>
|
||||
<H2>Native Language Support Library and Tools</H2>
|
||||
<H2>Edition 0.10.35, 1 May 1998</H2>
|
||||
<ADDRESS>Ulrich Drepper</ADDRESS>
|
||||
<ADDRESS>Jim Meyering</ADDRESS>
|
||||
<ADDRESS>Fran@,{c}ois Pinard</ADDRESS>
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
<P><HR><P>
|
||||
|
||||
</P>
|
||||
|
||||
<UL>
|
||||
<LI><A NAME="TOC1" HREF="gettext_1.html#SEC1">Introduction</A>
|
||||
<UL>
|
||||
<LI><A NAME="TOC2" HREF="gettext_1.html#SEC2">The Purpose of GNU <CODE>gettext</CODE></A>
|
||||
<LI><A NAME="TOC3" HREF="gettext_1.html#SEC3">I18n, L10n, and Such</A>
|
||||
<LI><A NAME="TOC4" HREF="gettext_1.html#SEC4">Aspects in Native Language Support</A>
|
||||
<LI><A NAME="TOC5" HREF="gettext_1.html#SEC5">Files Conveying Translations</A>
|
||||
<LI><A NAME="TOC6" HREF="gettext_1.html#SEC6">Overview of GNU <CODE>gettext</CODE></A>
|
||||
</UL>
|
||||
<LI><A NAME="TOC7" HREF="gettext_2.html#SEC7">PO Files and PO Mode Basics</A>
|
||||
<UL>
|
||||
<LI><A NAME="TOC8" HREF="gettext_2.html#SEC8">Completing GNU <CODE>gettext</CODE> Installation</A>
|
||||
<LI><A NAME="TOC9" HREF="gettext_2.html#SEC9">The Format of PO Files</A>
|
||||
<LI><A NAME="TOC10" HREF="gettext_2.html#SEC10">Main PO mode Commands</A>
|
||||
<LI><A NAME="TOC11" HREF="gettext_2.html#SEC11">Entry Positioning</A>
|
||||
<LI><A NAME="TOC12" HREF="gettext_2.html#SEC12">Normalizing Strings in Entries</A>
|
||||
</UL>
|
||||
<LI><A NAME="TOC13" HREF="gettext_3.html#SEC13">Preparing Program Sources</A>
|
||||
<UL>
|
||||
<LI><A NAME="TOC14" HREF="gettext_3.html#SEC14">Triggering <CODE>gettext</CODE> Operations</A>
|
||||
<LI><A NAME="TOC15" HREF="gettext_3.html#SEC15">How Marks Appears in Sources</A>
|
||||
<LI><A NAME="TOC16" HREF="gettext_3.html#SEC16">Marking Translatable Strings</A>
|
||||
<LI><A NAME="TOC17" HREF="gettext_3.html#SEC17">Special Comments preceding Keywords</A>
|
||||
<LI><A NAME="TOC18" HREF="gettext_3.html#SEC18">Special Cases of Translatable Strings</A>
|
||||
</UL>
|
||||
<LI><A NAME="TOC19" HREF="gettext_4.html#SEC19">Making the Initial PO File</A>
|
||||
<UL>
|
||||
<LI><A NAME="TOC20" HREF="gettext_4.html#SEC20">Invoking the <CODE>xgettext</CODE> Program</A>
|
||||
<LI><A NAME="TOC21" HREF="gettext_4.html#SEC21">C Sources Context</A>
|
||||
<LI><A NAME="TOC22" HREF="gettext_4.html#SEC22">Using Translation Compendiums</A>
|
||||
</UL>
|
||||
<LI><A NAME="TOC23" HREF="gettext_5.html#SEC23">Updating Existing PO Files</A>
|
||||
<UL>
|
||||
<LI><A NAME="TOC24" HREF="gettext_5.html#SEC24">Invoking the <CODE>msgmerge</CODE> Program</A>
|
||||
<LI><A NAME="TOC25" HREF="gettext_5.html#SEC25">Translated Entries</A>
|
||||
<LI><A NAME="TOC26" HREF="gettext_5.html#SEC26">Fuzzy Entries</A>
|
||||
<LI><A NAME="TOC27" HREF="gettext_5.html#SEC27">Untranslated Entries</A>
|
||||
<LI><A NAME="TOC28" HREF="gettext_5.html#SEC28">Obsolete Entries</A>
|
||||
<LI><A NAME="TOC29" HREF="gettext_5.html#SEC29">Modifying Translations</A>
|
||||
<LI><A NAME="TOC30" HREF="gettext_5.html#SEC30">Modifying Comments</A>
|
||||
<LI><A NAME="TOC31" HREF="gettext_5.html#SEC31">Consulting Auxiliary PO Files</A>
|
||||
</UL>
|
||||
<LI><A NAME="TOC32" HREF="gettext_6.html#SEC32">Producing Binary MO Files</A>
|
||||
<UL>
|
||||
<LI><A NAME="TOC33" HREF="gettext_6.html#SEC33">Invoking the <CODE>msgfmt</CODE> Program</A>
|
||||
<LI><A NAME="TOC34" HREF="gettext_6.html#SEC34">The Format of GNU MO Files</A>
|
||||
</UL>
|
||||
<LI><A NAME="TOC35" HREF="gettext_7.html#SEC35">The User's View</A>
|
||||
<UL>
|
||||
<LI><A NAME="TOC36" HREF="gettext_7.html#SEC36">The Current <TT>`ABOUT-NLS'</TT> Matrix</A>
|
||||
<LI><A NAME="TOC37" HREF="gettext_7.html#SEC37">Magic for Installers</A>
|
||||
<LI><A NAME="TOC38" HREF="gettext_7.html#SEC38">Magic for End Users</A>
|
||||
</UL>
|
||||
<LI><A NAME="TOC39" HREF="gettext_8.html#SEC39">The Programmer's View</A>
|
||||
<UL>
|
||||
<LI><A NAME="TOC40" HREF="gettext_8.html#SEC40">About <CODE>catgets</CODE></A>
|
||||
<UL>
|
||||
<LI><A NAME="TOC41" HREF="gettext_8.html#SEC41">The Interface</A>
|
||||
<LI><A NAME="TOC42" HREF="gettext_8.html#SEC42">Problems with the <CODE>catgets</CODE> Interface?!</A>
|
||||
</UL>
|
||||
<LI><A NAME="TOC43" HREF="gettext_8.html#SEC43">About <CODE>gettext</CODE></A>
|
||||
<UL>
|
||||
<LI><A NAME="TOC44" HREF="gettext_8.html#SEC44">The Interface</A>
|
||||
<LI><A NAME="TOC45" HREF="gettext_8.html#SEC45">Solving Ambiguities</A>
|
||||
<LI><A NAME="TOC46" HREF="gettext_8.html#SEC46">Locating Message Catalog Files</A>
|
||||
<LI><A NAME="TOC47" HREF="gettext_8.html#SEC47">Optimization of the *gettext functions</A>
|
||||
</UL>
|
||||
<LI><A NAME="TOC48" HREF="gettext_8.html#SEC48">Comparing the Two Interfaces</A>
|
||||
<LI><A NAME="TOC49" HREF="gettext_8.html#SEC49">Using libintl.a in own programs</A>
|
||||
<LI><A NAME="TOC50" HREF="gettext_8.html#SEC50">Being a <CODE>gettext</CODE> grok</A>
|
||||
<LI><A NAME="TOC51" HREF="gettext_8.html#SEC51">Temporary Notes for the Programmers Chapter</A>
|
||||
<UL>
|
||||
<LI><A NAME="TOC52" HREF="gettext_8.html#SEC52">Temporary - Two Possible Implementations</A>
|
||||
<LI><A NAME="TOC53" HREF="gettext_8.html#SEC53">Temporary - About <CODE>catgets</CODE></A>
|
||||
<LI><A NAME="TOC54" HREF="gettext_8.html#SEC54">Temporary - Why a single implementation</A>
|
||||
<LI><A NAME="TOC55" HREF="gettext_8.html#SEC55">Temporary - Notes</A>
|
||||
</UL>
|
||||
</UL>
|
||||
<LI><A NAME="TOC56" HREF="gettext_9.html#SEC56">The Translator's View</A>
|
||||
<UL>
|
||||
<LI><A NAME="TOC57" HREF="gettext_9.html#SEC57">Introduction 0</A>
|
||||
<LI><A NAME="TOC58" HREF="gettext_9.html#SEC58">Introduction 1</A>
|
||||
<LI><A NAME="TOC59" HREF="gettext_9.html#SEC59">Discussions</A>
|
||||
<LI><A NAME="TOC60" HREF="gettext_9.html#SEC60">Organization</A>
|
||||
<UL>
|
||||
<LI><A NAME="TOC61" HREF="gettext_9.html#SEC61">Central Coordination</A>
|
||||
<LI><A NAME="TOC62" HREF="gettext_9.html#SEC62">National Teams</A>
|
||||
<UL>
|
||||
<LI><A NAME="TOC63" HREF="gettext_9.html#SEC63">Sub-Cultures</A>
|
||||
<LI><A NAME="TOC64" HREF="gettext_9.html#SEC64">Organizational Ideas</A>
|
||||
</UL>
|
||||
<LI><A NAME="TOC65" HREF="gettext_9.html#SEC65">Mailing Lists</A>
|
||||
</UL>
|
||||
<LI><A NAME="TOC66" HREF="gettext_9.html#SEC66">Information Flow</A>
|
||||
</UL>
|
||||
<LI><A NAME="TOC67" HREF="gettext_10.html#SEC67">The Maintainer's View</A>
|
||||
<UL>
|
||||
<LI><A NAME="TOC68" HREF="gettext_10.html#SEC68">Flat or Non-Flat Directory Structures</A>
|
||||
<LI><A NAME="TOC69" HREF="gettext_10.html#SEC69">Prerequisite Works</A>
|
||||
<LI><A NAME="TOC70" HREF="gettext_10.html#SEC70">Invoking the <CODE>gettextize</CODE> Program</A>
|
||||
<LI><A NAME="TOC71" HREF="gettext_10.html#SEC71">Files You Must Create or Alter</A>
|
||||
<UL>
|
||||
<LI><A NAME="TOC72" HREF="gettext_10.html#SEC72"><TT>`POTFILES.in'</TT> in <TT>`po/'</TT></A>
|
||||
<LI><A NAME="TOC73" HREF="gettext_10.html#SEC73"><TT>`configure.in'</TT> at top level</A>
|
||||
<LI><A NAME="TOC74" HREF="gettext_10.html#SEC74"><TT>`aclocal.m4'</TT> at top level</A>
|
||||
<LI><A NAME="TOC75" HREF="gettext_10.html#SEC75"><TT>`acconfig.h'</TT> at top level</A>
|
||||
<LI><A NAME="TOC76" HREF="gettext_10.html#SEC76"><TT>`Makefile.in'</TT> at top level</A>
|
||||
<LI><A NAME="TOC77" HREF="gettext_10.html#SEC77"><TT>`Makefile.in'</TT> in <TT>`src/'</TT></A>
|
||||
</UL>
|
||||
</UL>
|
||||
<LI><A NAME="TOC78" HREF="gettext_11.html#SEC78">Concluding Remarks</A>
|
||||
<UL>
|
||||
<LI><A NAME="TOC79" HREF="gettext_11.html#SEC79">History of GNU <CODE>gettext</CODE></A>
|
||||
<LI><A NAME="TOC80" HREF="gettext_11.html#SEC80">Related Readings</A>
|
||||
</UL>
|
||||
<LI><A NAME="TOC81" HREF="gettext_12.html#SEC81">Country Codes</A>
|
||||
</UL>
|
||||
<P><HR><P>
|
||||
This document was generated on 25 January 1999 using the
|
||||
<A HREF="http://wwwcn.cern.ch/dci/texi2html/">texi2html</A>
|
||||
translator version 1.51a.</P>
|
||||
</BODY>
|
||||
</HTML>
|
@ -24,7 +24,6 @@ downloaded from the <a href="http://www.wxwidgets.org">wxWidgets Web site</a>.<b
|
||||
[<a href="#install">Install</a>]
|
||||
[<a href="#manuals">Manuals</a>]
|
||||
[<a href="#technotes">Technical Notes</a>]
|
||||
[<a href="#thirdparty">3rd party tools</a>]
|
||||
[<a href="#samples">Samples</a>]
|
||||
[<a href="#demos">Demos</a>]
|
||||
</FONT>
|
||||
@ -205,26 +204,6 @@ or downloading a binary, for example from <a href="http://www.storylinescentral.
|
||||
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
|
||||
<table width=100% border=0 cellpadding=3 cellspacing=0>
|
||||
<tr>
|
||||
<td bgcolor="#004080" align=left height=24 background="images/bluetitlegradient.gif">
|
||||
<font size=+1 face="Arial, Lucida Sans, Helvetica" color="#FFFFFF">
|
||||
<b><a name="thirdparty">Thirty-party tools</a></b>
|
||||
</font>
|
||||
</td>
|
||||
</tr>
|
||||
</table>
|
||||
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
|
||||
<ul>
|
||||
<li><a href="gettext/index.html">gettext Manual</a>
|
||||
</ul>
|
||||
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
|
||||
<P>
|
||||
|
||||
<table width=100% border=0 cellpadding=3 cellspacing=0>
|
||||
<tr>
|
||||
<td bgcolor="#004080" align=left height=24 background="images/bluetitlegradient.gif">
|
||||
|
@ -55,8 +55,7 @@ default directory.
|
||||
given language: see \helpref{wxLocale}{wxlocale}.
|
||||
\end{enumerate}
|
||||
|
||||
See also the GNU gettext documentation linked from {\tt docs/html/index.htm} in
|
||||
your wxWidgets distribution.
|
||||
See also the \urlref{GNU gettext documentation}{http://www.gnu.org/software/gettext/manual/gettext.html}.
|
||||
|
||||
See also \helpref{Writing non-English applications}{nonenglishoverview}.
|
||||
It focuses on handling charsets related problems.
|
||||
|
Loading…
Reference in New Issue
Block a user